S-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 2544 13 Part no. 222 584 08 03 Edition C 2015

É2225840803IËÍ2225840803

S-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RBurmester® is a registered trademark ofBurmester Audiosysteme GmbH.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This text indicates a message in themultifunction/COMAND/Audio dis-play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 13.02.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.You can also use the S‑Class Guide smart-phone app:

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2225840803 É2225840803IËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 24

At a glance ........................................... 33

Safety ................................................... 45

Opening and closing ........................... 89

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 119

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 149

Climate control ................................. 163

Driving and parking .......................... 187

On-board computer and displays .... 293

Stowage and features ...................... 371

Maintenance and care ...................... 403

Roadside Assistance ........................ 421

Wheels and tires ............................... 441

Technical data ................................... 487

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 24812 V socket

see Sockets115 V socket ...................................... 385360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 416Function/notes ............................. 260

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 317Function/notes ................................ 76Important safety notes .................... 77Warning lamp ................................. 358

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 68

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 170Activating/deactivating NightView Assist Plus

With spotlight function ................... 268Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 309Display message ............................ 344Function/information .................... 270

Active Body Control (ABC)Display message ............................ 342Function/notes ............................. 244

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 310Display message ............................ 343Function/information .................... 273

Active multicontour seat .................. 134Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 252Display message ............................ 344Exiting a parking space .................. 254Function/notes ............................. 251

Important safety notes .................. 251Parking .......................................... 253

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 84Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 81Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 247Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Display message ............................ 336Function/notes ............................. 153Switching on/off ........................... 154

Additional speedometer ................... 313Additives (engine oil) ........................ 492Air bags

Belt bags .......................................... 53Cushion air bags .............................. 59Deployment ..................................... 65Display message ............................ 332Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 57Important safety notes .................... 56Introduction ..................................... 56Knee bag .......................................... 58PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 50Side impact air bag .......................... 58Window curtain air bag .................... 59

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 185Important safety notes .................. 184Rear ............................................... 185Setting ........................................... 184Setting the center air vents ........... 184Setting the side air vents ............... 184

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 341Function/notes ............................. 246

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 86Switching off (ATA) .......................... 86Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 86

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

4 Index

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

ArmrestStowage compartment .................. 374

Ashtray ............................................... 382Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 307Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 308ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 410Hiding a service message .............. 410Notes ............................................. 410Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 410Service message ............................ 410Special service requirements ......... 411

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 86Function ........................................... 86Switching off the alarm .................... 86

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 310Display message ............................ 341Function/notes ............................. 264

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 335see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 411Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 194Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 193Automatic headlamp mode .............. 150Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 200Automatic drive program ............... 202Changing gear ............................... 200DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 197Display message ............................ 351Driving tips .................................... 200Emergency running mode .............. 205Engaging drive position .................. 198

Engaging neutral ............................ 198Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 197Engaging reverse gear ................... 197Engaging the park position ............ 197Kickdown ....................................... 200Manual drive program .................... 202Manual drive program (AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 203Overview ........................................ 197Problem (malfunction) ................... 205Program selector button ................ 200Pulling away ................................... 192Starting the engine ........................ 192Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 201Transmission position display ........ 199Transmission positions .................. 199

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 205

BBAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 77BAS PLUS Q (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 77Important safety notes .................... 78

Battery (high-voltage)see High-voltage battery

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 94Important safety notes .................... 93Replacing ......................................... 94

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 430Display message ............................ 337Important safety notes .................. 427Jump starting ................................. 432

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt bag ................................................ 53Blind Spot Assist

see Active Blind Spot AssistBrake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 324Notes ............................................. 492

Index 5

Brake force distribution, elec-tronic

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 334

Brake pedalPedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 48

BrakesABS .................................................. 76Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 81BAS .................................................. 77BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 77Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 492Display message ............................ 317EBD .................................................. 83High-performance brake system .... 227Hill start assist ............................... 192HOLD function ............................... 242Important safety notes .................. 226Maintenance .................................. 226Parking brake ................................ 222RBS warning lamp .......................... 366Recuperative Brake System ............. 48Riding tips ...................................... 226Warning lamp ................................. 357

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 37Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 295

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 26

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Camerasee 360° camera

Carsee Vehicle

Car keysee SmartKey

Care360° camera ................................. 416Car wash ........................................ 411Carpets .......................................... 419Display ........................................... 417Exhaust pipe .................................. 417Exterior lights ................................ 415Gear or selector lever .................... 418Interior ........................................... 417Matte finish ................................... 414Night View Assist Plus ................... 417Notes ............................................. 411Paint .............................................. 413Plastic trim .................................... 418Power washer ................................ 413Rear view camera .......................... 416Roof lining ...................................... 419Seat belt ........................................ 419Seat cover ..................................... 418Sensors ......................................... 415Steering wheel ............................... 418Trim pieces .................................... 418Washing by hand ........................... 413Wheels ........................................... 414Windows ........................................ 415Wiper blades .................................. 415Wooden trim .................................. 418

CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 304Center console

Overview .......................................... 39Stowage space .............................. 373

Center console in the rear com-partment

Stowage compartment .................. 375Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 91Charging

see Charging the high-voltage bat-tery (important safety notes)

Charging cableConnecting .................................... 214Controls ......................................... 213Important safety notes .................. 212Indicator lamp ................................ 214Removing ....................................... 215Storing ........................................... 212Warming up ................................... 211

6 Index

Charging the high-voltage battery(important safety notes) ................... 209Chauffeur mode

Display message ............................ 352Fully reclined position .................... 131General notes ................................ 127Installing the head restraint ........... 129Moving front-passenger seat intothe chauffeur position .................... 128Moving the front-passenger seatinto the normal position ................. 130Removing the head restraint .......... 129

ChildRestraint system .............................. 70

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 74LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 71On the front-passenger seat ............ 74Rearward-facing restraint system .... 74Top Tether ....................................... 73

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 74Rear doors ....................................... 75

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 69Special seat belt retractor ............... 69

Cigarette lighter ................................ 383Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 415Climate control

Automatic climate control ............. 165Controlling automatically ............... 171Cooling with air dehumidification .. 170Defrosting the windows ................. 176Defrosting the windshield .............. 175ECO start/stop function ................ 169General notes ................................ 164Immediate pre-entry climate con-trol ................................................. 183Indicator lamp ................................ 171Ionization ....................................... 180Notes on using the automatic cli-mate control .................................. 169Overview of systems ...................... 164Perfume atomizer .......................... 178

Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time (REMOTE CLI-MATE CONTROL) ........................... 182Pre-entry climate control via key ... 180Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 177Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 171Rear control panel ......................... 165Refrigerant ..................................... 494Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 495Setting the air distribution ............. 174Setting the air vents ...................... 184Setting the airflow ......................... 174Setting the climate mode ............... 173Setting the temperature ................ 173Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 177Switching on/off ........................... 169Switching residual heat on/off ...... 177Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 176Switching the synchronizationfunction on and off ........................ 175

Climate control systemClimate control .............................. 169

CockpitOverview .......................................... 34

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 309Display message ............................ 325Operation/notes .............................. 79

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 417

Combination switch .......................... 152Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 300Convenience closing feature ............ 108Convenience opening feature .......... 107Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 408Display message ............................ 336Displaying the temperature (on-board computer) ............................ 307Filling capacity ............................... 493Important safety notes .................. 493Temperature gauge ........................ 294

Index 7

Warning lamp ................................. 364Coolbox .............................................. 388Cooling

see Climate controlCopyright ............................................. 31Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 333Function/notes ............................. 153

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 156Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ................... 244Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 83Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 230Deactivating ................................... 231Display message ............................ 347Driving system ............................... 229Function/notes ............................. 229Important safety notes .................. 229Setting a speed .............................. 231Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 230

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 378Important safety notes .................. 378Rear compartment ......................... 379Temperature controlled ................. 380

Cushion air bags .................................. 59Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 29Customer Relations Department ....... 29

DData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 335Function/notes ............................. 150Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 312

Declarations of conformity ................. 28Diagnostics connection ...................... 28Digital speedometer ......................... 301DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 197

Displaysee Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 410Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 316Driving systems ............................. 341Engine ............................................ 336General notes ................................ 316Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 316Hybrid system ................................ 340Introduction ................................... 316Lights ............................................. 333Safety systems .............................. 317SmartKey ....................................... 354Tires ............................................... 348Vehicle ........................................... 351

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 367Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 80DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 233Activation conditions ..................... 233Cruise control lever ....................... 233Deactivating ................................... 238Display message ............................ 346Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 237Driving tips .................................... 238Function/notes ............................. 231Important safety notes .................. 232Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 236

DoorsAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 98Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 91Control panel ................................... 42Display message ............................ 352Emergency locking ........................... 99Emergency unlocking ....................... 98Important safety notes .................... 97Opening (from inside) ...................... 97Power closing .................................. 98

Drinking and driving ......................... 224

8 Index

Drive programAutomatic ...................................... 202Manual ........................................... 202Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 203SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 314

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driver's/front-passenger seatStowage compartment .................. 374

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 411Symmetrical low beam .................. 150

Driving Assistance package ............. 270Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 76ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 84Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 81BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 77BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 77COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 79Distance warning function ............... 80EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 83ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 81ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 82Important safety information ........... 76Overview .......................................... 76PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 84Recuperative Brake System ............. 48STEER CONTROL ............................. 86

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 260Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 270Active Body Control ABC ............... 244Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 273Active Parking Assist ..................... 251AIRMATIC ...................................... 246ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 264Cruise control ................................ 229Display message ............................ 341DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 231DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 240

Driving Assistance package ........... 270HOLD function ............................... 242Night View Assist Plus ................... 266PARKTRONIC ................................. 248Rear view camera .......................... 256

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 227Automatic transmission ................. 200Brakes ........................................... 226Break-in period .............................. 188DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 238Downhill gradient ........................... 226Drinking and driving ....................... 224Driving abroad ............................... 150Driving in winter ............................. 228Driving on flooded roads ................ 228Driving on wet roads ...................... 228Exhaust check ............................... 224Fuel ................................................ 224General .......................................... 224Hydroplaning ................................. 228Icy road surfaces ........................... 228Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 226Snow chains .................................. 445Symmetrical low beam .................. 150The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 188Wet road surface ........................... 226

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 305

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 139EASY-EXIT feature

Crash-responsive ........................... 140Function/notes ............................. 139

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 320Function/notes ................................ 83

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 225On-board computer ....................... 300

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 194Automatic engine switch-off .......... 193

Index 9

Deactivating/activating ................. 194General information ....................... 193Important safety notes .................. 193Introduction ................................... 193

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 68

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 98Trunk ............................................. 105Vehicle ............................................. 98

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 65

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 25

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 363Display message ............................ 336ECO start/stop function ................ 193Engine number ............................... 489Irregular running ............................ 196Jump-starting ................................. 432Starting problems .......................... 196Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 192Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 192Switching off .................................. 221Switching off with the Start/Stopbutton ............................................ 221Switching off with the vehicle key .. 221Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 438

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 196

Engine emergency stop .................... 440Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 407Additives ........................................ 492Checking the oil level ..................... 405Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 405Checking the oil level using theon-board computer ........................ 407Display message ............................ 338Filling capacity ............................... 492Notes about oil grades ................... 491

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 405Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 314Viscosity ........................................ 492

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 314Characteristics ................................. 82Deactivating/activating ................... 82Display message ............................ 317ETS/4ETS ........................................ 82Function/notes ................................ 81General notes .................................. 81Important safety information ........... 82Warning lamp ................................. 360

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 82Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust check ................................... 224Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 417Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-age battery) ....................................... 429Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 415see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 141Dipping (automatic) ....................... 142Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 141Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 141Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 142Setting ........................................... 141Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 144Storing the parking position .......... 142

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 373

FFeatures ............................................. 378Filler cap

see Fuel filler flapFilling capacities (Technical data) ... 489Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 465

10 Index

MOExtended tires .......................... 423Preparing the vehicle ..................... 423TIREFIT kit ...................................... 424

Floormats ........................................... 401Folding table ...................................... 376Front-passenger seat

Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 124Adjusting from the rear compart-ment .............................................. 124

FuelAdditives ........................................ 491Consumption statistics .................. 300Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 299Displaying the range ...................... 299Driving tips .................................... 224Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Grade (gasoline) ............................ 490Important safety notes .................. 490Problem (malfunction) ................... 209Refueling ........................................ 205Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 490

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 207Opening (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles) ............................................... 207

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 299

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 490Problem (malfunction) ................... 209

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 440Before changing ............................. 438Dashboard fuse box ....................... 439Engine emergency stop ................. 440Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 439Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 439Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 440Important safety notes .................. 438

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 401

General notes ................................ 397Important safety notes .................. 398Opening/closing the garage door .. 400Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 398Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 399

Gasoline ............................................. 490Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 314Genuine parts ...................................... 24Glove box ........................................... 373

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS ....................... 102Hazard warning lamps ...................... 152Head bags

Display message ............................ 330Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 131Adjusting (manually) ...................... 131Adjusting (rear) .............................. 133EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint ......................................... 132Luxury ............................................ 132Supplementary cushion ................. 133

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 312Function/notes ............................. 297Important safety notes .................. 297Setting the position ....................... 311Switching on or off ......................... 297Switching the display on/off ......... 311

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 155see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 152High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 153Display message ............................ 334Switching on/off ........................... 152

High-voltage batteryBattery care ................................... 211Charging (charging station) ............ 216

Index 11

Charging (mains socket) ................ 212Charging (wallbox) ......................... 215Charging cable warming ................ 211Cruise range .................................. 211Energy consumption ...................... 211General notes .................................. 48Method of operation ...................... 210Outside temperatures .................... 211Overvoltage protection .................. 212Problems with the charging proc-ess ................................................. 218Terms of use .................................. 211Vehicle fire ....................................... 48

Hill start assist .................................. 192HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 243Deactivating ................................... 243Display message ............................ 346Function/notes ............................. 242

HoodClosing ........................................... 405Display message ............................ 352Important safety notes .................. 404Opening ......................................... 404

Horn ...................................................... 34Hybrid drive

Hybrid menu (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 310

Hybrid systemAutomatic deactivation .................... 46Danger of electric shock .................. 46Display message ............................ 340High-voltage battery ........................ 48Important safety notes .................... 46Manual deactivation ......................... 47Opening the hood ............................ 48Warning lamp ................................. 366

Hybrid vehiclesImportant safety notes .................... 46

Hydroplaning ..................................... 228

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 86

Indicator and warning lampsCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 367

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 35Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36

Instrument cluster lighting ................ 37Interior lighting

Control ........................................... 155Emergency lighting ........................ 156Overview ........................................ 155Reading lamp ................................. 155

JJack

Using ............................................. 467Jump starting (engine) ...................... 432

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 189Start/Stop button .......................... 189

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature .......... 108Deactivation ..................................... 91Locking ............................................ 91Unlocking ......................................... 91

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 200

Knee bag .............................................. 58

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping AssistLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 71License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 334Light function, active

Display message ............................ 335

12 Index

Light sensor (display message) ....... 335Lights

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 153Automatic headlamp mode ............ 150Cornering light function ................. 153Driving abroad ............................... 150Fogged up headlamps .................... 155Hazard warning lamps ................... 152High beam flasher .......................... 152High-beam headlamps ................... 152Light switch ................................... 150Low-beam headlamps .................... 151Parking lamps ................................ 151Setting exterior lighting ................. 150Standing lamps .............................. 151Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 312Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 312Turn signals ................................... 152see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 372Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 98Emergency locking ........................... 99From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 97

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 333Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 150Switching on/off ........................... 151

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 134

Luxury head restraints ..................... 132

MM+S tires ............................................ 444Magic Body Control ........................... 243MAGIC SKY CONTROL ....................... 114

Malfunction messagesee Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 414Maximum charge current

Setting (charging cable) ................. 213Setting (on-board computer) .......... 310

MBCsee Magic Body Control

mbraceCall priority .................................... 393Display message ............................ 324Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 394Downloading routes ....................... 397Emergency call .............................. 391General notes ................................ 389Geo fencing ................................... 397Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 396MB info call button ........................ 393Remote fault diagnosis .................. 396Remote vehicle locking .................. 395Roadside Assistance button .......... 392Search & Send ............................... 394Self-test ......................................... 390Speed alert .................................... 397System .......................................... 390Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 397Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 395

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 93Inserting .......................................... 93Locking vehicle ................................ 99Removing ......................................... 93Unlocking the driver's door .............. 98

Media Interfacesee Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 304Memory function

In the rear compartment ................ 144Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 143Storing settings (rear compart-ment) ............................................. 145

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 260ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 76Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 270

Index 13

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 273Active Parking Assist ..................... 251ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 264BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 77BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 77Crosswind Assist (vehicles withMAGIC BODY CONTROL) ............... 244Crosswind Assist (vehicles with-out MAGIC BODY CONTROL) ........... 83Cruise control ................................ 229DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 231DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 240ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 81General notes ................................ 229MAGIC BODY CONTROL ................ 243Night View Assist Plus ................... 266PARKTRONIC ................................. 248PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 67PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 84PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 68Rear view camera .......................... 256ROAD SURFACE SCAN .................. 245

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 316Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 415

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 305

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 92MOExtended tires .............................. 423Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 470Mounting a new wheel ................... 470Preparing the vehicle ..................... 466

Raising the vehicle ......................... 467Removing a wheel .......................... 469Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 466

MP3Operation ....................................... 304

Multicontour seat .............................. 134Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 296Permanent display ......................... 313

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 295Overview .......................................... 37

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 301Night View Assist Plus

Activating/deactivating ................. 268Cleaning ......................................... 417Display message ............................ 345Function/notes ............................. 266Problem (malfunction) ................... 270Switching automatic activationon/off ............................................ 308

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 188

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 59Faults ............................................... 64Operation ......................................... 60System self-test ............................... 62

Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 68Children in the vehicle ..................... 69Important safety notes .................... 49Pets in the vehicle ........................... 76PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 67

OCSConditions ....................................... 59Faults ............................................... 64

14 Index

Operation ......................................... 60System self-test ............................... 62

Odometer ........................................... 299Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 314Assistance graphic menu ............... 307Assistance menu ........................... 308Display messages .......................... 316Displaying a service message ........ 410DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 237Factory settings ............................. 314Head-up display ............................. 297Important safety notes .................. 294Instrument cluster menu ............... 312Lights menu ................................... 312Media menu ................................... 304Menu overview .............................. 299Message memory .......................... 316Navigation menu ............................ 301Operation ....................................... 295Radio menu ................................... 303Service menu ................................. 307Settings menu ............................... 308Standard display ............................ 299Telephone menu ............................ 305Trip menu ...................................... 299Video DVD operation ..................... 305

Online access .................................... 219Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 28Important safety notes .................... 27

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualOverview .......................................... 25Vehicle equipment ........................... 25

Outside temperature display ........... 295Overhead control panel ...................... 41Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 75

PPaint code number ............................ 488Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 413Panic alarm .......................................... 49

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes .................. 110Opening/closing ............................ 111Problem (malfunction) ................... 117Resetting ....................................... 115

Parcel net hooks ............................... 376Parking

Important safety notes .................. 220Parking brake ................................ 222Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 142Rear view camera .......................... 256see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 251see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 320Electric parking brake .................... 222Warning lamp ................................. 362

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 151

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 250Driving system ............................... 248Function/notes ............................. 248Important safety notes .................. 248Problem (malfunction) ................... 251Range of the sensors ..................... 249Warning display ............................. 250

PASSENGER AIR BAGIndicator lamps ................................ 50

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamp

Problem (malfunction) ................... 332Perfume atomizer

Operating ....................................... 178Perfume vial ................................... 178Problem (malfunction) ................... 180

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 76Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 418

Index 15

PLUG-IN HYBRID operationAutomatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 289Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 288Charging the high-voltage battery .. 282Condition of charge, high-voltagebattery ........................................... 281Displaying the total range andelectrical range .............................. 284Driving tips .................................... 287ECO start/stop function ................ 288Electric motor (power display) ....... 279Energy flow display ........................ 281Fuel consumption .......................... 285Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ 285General information ....................... 276Generated electrical energy ........... 285Generated electrical energy(COMAND) ..................................... 285Haptic accelerator pedal ................ 286High-voltage battery (condition ofcharge) .......................................... 281Important safety notes .................. 276Instrument cluster (power dis-play) ............................................... 279Manual drive program .................... 286Map-based energy management .... 289Noiseless start ............................... 285Operating (on-board computer) ..... 281Operating mode ............................. 280Overrun mode ................................ 289Overview, hybrid system ................ 278Overview, instrument cluster ......... 279Parking .......................................... 289Power display, electric motor ........ 279Problemswith SRS (SupplementalRestraint System) .......................... 291Problems with the combustionengine ............................................ 290Problems with the hybrid system ... 291Program selector button ................ 285Pulling away ................................... 285RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 276RBS (Recuperative Brake System)problems ....................................... 290READY indicator ............................. 285

Resetting values (COMAND) .......... 285Starting the vehicle ........................ 285Stationary vehicle .......................... 287

Power locks ......................................... 98Power washers .................................. 413Power windows

see Side windowsPre-entry climate control (viaSmartKey)

Problems (malfunctions) ................ 182PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 324Operation ......................................... 67

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 309Display message ............................ 325Function/notes ................................ 84Important safety notes .................... 84Warning lamp ................................. 367

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 68Program selector button .................. 200Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 86Immobilizer ...................................... 86

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 24

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 192General notes ................................ 192Hill start assist ............................... 192

QQR code

Rescue card ..................................... 30Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29

RRadio

Selecting a station ......................... 303Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 28

16 Index

RBS (Recuperative Brake System)Warning lamp ................................. 366

Reading lamp ..................................... 155Rear compartment

Activating/deactivating climatecontrol ........................................... 169Setting the air distribution ............. 174Setting the air vents ...................... 185Setting the airflow ......................... 174Setting the temperature ................ 173Stowage compartment .................. 374

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatsAdjusting ....................................... 123Adjusting a rear reclining seat ....... 123Overview .......................................... 43Setting the reclined position .......... 123

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 416Function/notes ............................. 256Switching on/off ........................... 257

Rear window blind ............................ 381Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 177Switching on/off ........................... 176

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 140Dipping (automatic) ....................... 142

Recuperation display ........................ 299Recuperative Brake System

Driving safety systems ..................... 48Important safety notes .................... 48

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 494Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 35Important safety notes .................. 205Refueling process .......................... 206see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 397Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 398

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 157

Reporting safety defects .................... 30

Rescue card ......................................... 30Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 339Warning lamp ................................. 363

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 177Restraint system

Display message ............................ 328Introduction ..................................... 49Warning lamp ................................. 362Warning lamp (function) ................... 50

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof .............. 111Roller sunblinds ............................. 112Side windows ................................. 106Trunk lid ......................................... 100

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 335ROAD SURFACE SCAN ....................... 245Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel .................................. 112Rear side windows ......................... 381Rear window .................................. 381

Roller sunblind of the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

Operating (front roller sunblind) .... 113Operating (rear roller sunblind) ...... 113

Roof carrier ........................................ 377Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 419Roof load (maximum) ........................ 495

SSafety

Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 59see Operating safety

Safety notesHybrid vehicles ................................ 46

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SeatMulticontour seat in the rear com-partment ........................................ 134

Index 17

Seat belt buckle extenderDisplay message ............................ 327

Seat belt extenderFunction/notes ................................ 55

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 55Adjusting the height ......................... 54Cleaning ......................................... 419Correct usage .................................. 53Fastening ......................................... 54Important safety guidelines ............. 51Introduction ..................................... 51Releasing ......................................... 55Seat belt extender ........................... 55Warning lamp ................................. 355Warning lamp (function) ................... 56

SeatingSeating comfort package ............... 134

Seating comfort package ................. 134Seats

Active multicontour seat ................ 134Adjusting (electrically) ................... 122Adjusting (rear compartment) ........ 123Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 134Adjusting the head restraint .......... 131Chauffeur mode ............................. 127Cleaning the cover ......................... 418Correct driver's seat position ........ 120Display message ............................ 352EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system ............. 139Important safety notes .................. 121Multicontour seat .......................... 134Seat heating .................................. 134Seat heating problem .................... 136Seat ventilation .............................. 136Seat ventilation problem ................ 137Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 144Switching seat heating on/off ....... 134Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 136

SectionWheels and tires ............................ 442

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 418see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 415

Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 307Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 492Coolant (engine) ............................ 493Engine oil ....................................... 491Fuel ................................................ 490Important safety notes .................. 489Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 494Washer fluid ................................... 494

Setting the charge current (on-board computer) ............................... 310Setting the departure time (on-board computer) ............................... 310Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 314On-board computer ....................... 308

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 314Side impact air bag ............................. 58Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 335Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 415Convenience closing feature .......... 108Convenience opening feature ........ 107Important safety information ......... 106Opening/closing ............................ 106Problem (malfunction) ................... 110Resetting ....................................... 109

Sliding sunroofsee Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 94Changing the programming ............. 92Checking the battery ....................... 94Convenience closing feature .......... 108Convenience opening feature ........ 107Display message ............................ 354Door central locking/unlocking ....... 91Important safety notes .................... 90KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 92Loss ................................................. 95Mechanical key ................................ 93Overview .......................................... 90Positions (ignition lock) ................. 189

18 Index

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95Starting the engine ........................ 192

Snow chains ...................................... 445Sockets

Center console .............................. 384General notes ................................ 384Rear compartment ......................... 385Trunk ............................................. 385

Special seat belt retractor .................. 69Specialist workshop ............................ 29Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 313Digital ............................................ 301In the Instrument cluster ................. 35Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 312see Instrument cluster

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 335Switching on/off ........................... 151

Start/Stop buttonRemoving ....................................... 191Starting the engine ........................ 192

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 191STEER CONTROL .................................. 86Steering

Warning lamps ............................... 369Steering (display message) .............. 353Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 347Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 137Button overview ............................... 37Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 295Cleaning ......................................... 418EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 139Important safety notes .................. 137Paddle shifters ............................... 201

Steering wheel heating .................. 138Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 144

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 139Switching on/off ........................... 138

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 201Stowage areas ................................... 372Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 374Center console .............................. 373Center console in rear compart-ment .............................................. 375Cup holders ................................... 378Door ............................................... 374Eyeglasses compartment ............... 373Glove box ....................................... 373Important safety information ......... 372Rear ............................................... 374Rear seat backrest ......................... 375Stowage net ................................... 376Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 374

Stowage net ....................................... 376Stowage space

Folding table .................................. 376Parcel net retainers ....................... 376Securing a load .............................. 376

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 377Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 444Sun visor ............................................ 380Suspension tuning

Active Body Control ABC ............... 244AIRMATIC ...................................... 247SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 314

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 177

TTachometer ........................................ 294Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 334see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 35

Index 19

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 489Information .................................... 488Tires/wheels ................................. 471Vehicle data ................................... 495

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 306Display message ............................ 353Introduction ................................... 305Menu (on-board computer) ............ 305Number from the phone book ........ 306Redialing ........................................ 306Rejecting/ending a call ................. 306

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 294Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 307Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 314Outside temperature ...................... 295Setting (climate control) ................ 173

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 449Checking manually ........................ 448Display message ............................ 348Important safety notes .................. 449Maximum ....................................... 448Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 426Notes ............................................. 447Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 426Recommended ............................... 445

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 452Important safety notes .................. 452Restarting ...................................... 452

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 450Function/notes ............................. 449General notes ................................ 449Important safety notes .................. 449Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 452Restarting ...................................... 451Warning lamp ................................. 368Warning message .......................... 451

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 424Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 464

Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 463Bar (definition) ............................... 463Changing a wheel .......................... 465Characteristics .............................. 463Checking ........................................ 443Curb weight (definition) ................. 464Definition of terms ......................... 463Direction of rotation ...................... 466Display message ............................ 348Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 465DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 463DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 462GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 463GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 464GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 464Important safety notes .................. 442Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 463Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 464Labeling (overview) ........................ 459Load bearing index (definition) ...... 465Load index ..................................... 462Load index (definition) ................... 464Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 464Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 464Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 464Maximum tire load ......................... 462Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 464MOExtended tires .......................... 444Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 465PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 464Replacing ....................................... 465Service life ..................................... 444Sidewall (definition) ....................... 465Speed rating (definition) ................ 464Storing ........................................... 466

20 Index

Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 463Summer tires in winter .................. 444Temperature .................................. 459TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 465Tire bead (definition) ...................... 465Tire pressure (definition) ................ 464Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 463Tire size (data) ............................... 471Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 459Tire tread ....................................... 443Tire tread (definition) ..................... 465Total load limit (definition) ............. 465Traction ......................................... 458Traction (definition) ....................... 465Tread wear ..................................... 458Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 458Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 463Wear indicator (definition) ............. 465Wheel and tire combination ........... 473Wheel rim (definition) .................... 463see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 73Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 438Important safety notes .................. 435

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 435Installing the towing eye ................ 436Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 438Removing the towing eye ............... 436With both axles on the ground ....... 436With the rear axle raised ................ 437

Towing eye ......................................... 422Transfer case ..................................... 205Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransporting the vehicle .................. 437Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 418Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 300

Trip odometerCalling up ....................................... 299Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 301

TrunkEmergency release ........................ 105Important safety notes .................. 100Locking separately ......................... 104Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ................................... 104Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................. 101Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................. 102Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ......................................... 101Power closing .................................. 98

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 352Obstacle recognition ...................... 100Opening dimensions ...................... 495Opening/closing ............................ 100

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 495Turn signals

Display message ............................ 333Switching on/off ........................... 152

Two-way radioWindshield (infrared reflective) ...... 401

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 98From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 97

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 381Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 29Data acquisition ............................... 30Display message ............................ 351Equipment ....................................... 25Individual settings .......................... 308Limited Warranty ............................. 30Loading .......................................... 453Locking (in an emergency) ............... 99

Index 21

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 91Lowering ........................................ 470Maintenance .................................... 26Operating safety .............................. 27Parking for a long period ................ 223Pulling away ................................... 192Raising ........................................... 467Reporting problems ......................... 29Securing from rolling away ............ 466Towing away .................................. 435Transporting .................................. 437Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 98Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 91Vehicle data ................................... 495

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 495Vehicle emergency locking ................ 99Vehicle Homepage

Data protection .............................. 219Functions ....................................... 220General information ....................... 219Internet connection ....................... 220

Vehicle identification numbersee VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 488Vehicle level

Active Body Control ABC ............... 244Display message ............................ 341

Vehicle maintenancesee ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 422Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 305VIN ...................................................... 488

WWarning

Stickers ........................................... 46Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 358Brakes ........................................... 357Check Engine ................................. 363Coolant .......................................... 364Distance warning ........................... 367ESP® .............................................. 360ESP® OFF ....................................... 361Fuel tank ........................................ 363Hybrid system ................................ 366

Overview .......................................... 36Parking brake ................................ 362PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 50RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 366Reserve fuel ................................... 363Restraint system ............................ 362Seat belt ........................................ 355Steering ......................................... 369Tire pressure monitor .................... 368

Warranty .............................................. 25Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 353Wheel and tire combination

see TiresWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 470Wheel chock ...................................... 466Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 465Checking ........................................ 443Cleaning ......................................... 414Important safety notes .................. 442Interchanging/changing ................ 465Mounting a new wheel ................... 470Mounting a wheel .......................... 466Removing a wheel .......................... 469Storing ........................................... 466Tightening torque ........................... 470Wheel size/tire size ....................... 471

Window curtain air bagOperation ......................................... 59

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 175Infrared reflective .......................... 401

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 409Notes ............................................. 494

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 161Replacing the wiper blades ............ 158Switching on/off ........................... 157

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 444Slippery road surfaces ................... 228

22 Index

Snow chains .................................. 445Winter operation

Summer tires ................................. 444Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 444Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 415Important safety notes .................. 158Replacing ....................................... 158

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 418Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 23

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

H Environmental noteHave a defective high-voltage battery dis-posed of in an environmentally-responsiblemanner. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpit

24 Introduction

Rinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 488).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not

feature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

Introduction 25

Z

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

26 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

Introduction 27

Z

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engineand an electric motor. The voltage supply foroperating the vehicle electrically is providedby the vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-tem.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system are marked with yellowwarning stickers. The cables of the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system are orange incolor.Vehicles with an electric motor generatemuch less driving noise than vehicles withinternal combustion engines. As a result, yourvehicle may not be heard by other road usersin certain situations. This can happen, forexample, when you are parking and your vehi-cle is not seen by other road users. Thisrequires you to adopt a particularly anticipa-tory driving style, as it is necessary to allowfor the possibility that other road users maybehave erratically.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

28 Introduction

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.

Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic componentsRwork on the hybrid system

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Introduction 29

Z

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriaterescue card for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important infor-mation about your vehicle in a compact form,e.g. the routing of the electric cables.You can find more information at https://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

30 Introduction

is to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 31

Z

32

Cockpit ................................................. 34Instrument cluster .............................. 35Multifunction steering wheel ............. 37Center console .................................... 39Overhead control panel ...................... 41Door control panel .............................. 42Rear seats ............................................ 43

33

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 201

; Combination switch 152

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 35

A DIRECT SELECT lever 197

B Overhead control panel 41

C Control panel for:Ü Lowering the rearseat head restraints 133u Extending/retractingthe rear roller sunblind 381PASSENGER AIR BAG indi-cator lamp 50Setting the brightness ofthe instrument cluster light-ing and the COMAND dis-play

D Ignition lock 189Start/Stop button 189

E Climate control systems 164

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheel 137Steering wheel heating 138

G Cruise control lever 230

H Electric parking brake 222

I Diagnostics connection 28

J Opens the hood 404

K Light switch 150

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot 240Switching on Active LaneKeeping Assist 273Deactivating PARKTRONIC 248Switching on the 360° cam-era 260Activating Night ViewAssist 266Switching on the head-updisplay 311

34 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Multifunction display withoutside temperature dis-play 296

= Tachometer 294

Function Page

? Coolant temperature 294

A Fuel level and fuel filler flaplocation indicator8

Fuel filler flap location indicator8: the fuelfiller cap is on the right-hand side.

i Information on additional displays inPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles can be found inthe "PLUG-IN HYBRID drive" section(Y page 279).

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ! ABS 358

; å ESP® OFF 360÷ ESP® 360

= # Turn signal, left 152

? L Low-beam head-lamps 151

A K High-beam head-lamps 152

B T Parking lamps,license plate lamp andinstrument cluster lighting 151

C ! Turn signal, right 152

D · Distance warning sig-nal 367

Function Page

E ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 362

F Electric parking brake (red) 362F USA only! Canada only

G ; Check Engine 363

H Ð Power steering 369

I Brakes (red) 357$ USA onlyJ Canada only

J ü Seat belt 355

K 6 Restraint system 362

L h Tire pressure monitor 368

i Information on warning and indicatorlamps in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles can befound in the "PLUG-IN HYBRID drive" sec-tion (Y page 279).

36 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 296

; Sets the brightness of theinstrument cluster lightingand the COMAND display

= COMAND display; see theseparate COMAND operat-ing instructions

? CD and DVD player/changer; see the separateCOMAND operatinginstructions

A COMAND controller andbuttons; see the separateCOMAND operatinginstructions

Function Page

B ~

Rejects or ends a call 305Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Muteó

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 37

Ataglance

Function Page

C ò

Calls up the main menu9:

Selects a menu/submenuor scrolls through lists 295a

Confirms your selection 295Hides display messages 316%

Back 295ñ

Switches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the sepa-rate operating instructions

38 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Center console

Function Page

: Switches COMAND on/off(see the separate Opera-tor's Manual)

; Adjusts the volume/mute(see the separate Opera-tor's Manual)

= èECO start/stop func-tion 194

? Touchpad (see the separateOperator's Manual)Telephone keypad (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

A É Sets the vehicle level 244,246

Selects the operating mode(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 280

B Adjusts the suspension set-tings

244,246

Function Page

C Û Selects the drive pro-gram/program selectorbutton 200Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram/program selectorbutton (AMG vehicles) 200Selects automatic driveprograms E, S and E+(PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 285

D Back button (see the sepa-rate Operator's Manual)

E Seat adjustment button(see the separate operatinginstructions)

F Navigation button (see theseparate Operator's Man-ual)

G Radio button (see the sep-arate Operator's Manual)

H £ Hazard warninglamps 152

I Media button (see the sep-arate Operator's Manual)

Center console 39

Ataglance

Function Page

J Telephone, address bookand Internet button (seeseparate operating instruc-tions)

K Vehicle and system set-tings button (see separateoperating instructions)

L COMAND controller (seethe separate Operator'sManual)

i Information on the ECO start/stop func-tion for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles can befound in the "PLUG-IN hybrid drive" section(Y page 288).

40 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 155

; | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 155

= G SOS button (mbracesystem) 391

? c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 155

A u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 155

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 155

C ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 393

D Eyeglasses compartment 373

E 3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel 111Opens/closes the frontroller sunblinds 113

Function Page

F µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 114Opens/closes the rearroller sunblind 113

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 398

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

I F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 392

Overhead control panel 41

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: s Seat ventilation 136

; c Seat heating 134

= w Adjusts the front-passenger seat from thedriver’s seat 124

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 143

A Adjusts the seats electri-cally 122

B 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 141

C W Opens/closes theright side window 106

Function Page

D W Opens/closes therear right side window 106

E p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 104

F n Override feature forthe controls in the rearcompartment 75

G Opens the door 97

H %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 97

I W Opens/closes therear left side window 106

J WOpens/closes the leftside window 106

42 Door control panelAt

aglance

Rear seats

i Example: vehicles with Rear Seat Enter-tainment System

Function Page

: DVD player (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

; Cigarette lighter 383Socket 384

Function Page

= Cup holder 379

? Stowage compartment inthe rear seat armrest 375

A Stowage box in the seatbackrest 375Coolbox 388

Rear seats 43

Ataglance

44

Useful information .............................. 46Hybrid vehicles ................................... 46Panic alarm .......................................... 49Occupant safety .................................. 49Children in the vehicle ........................ 69Pets in the vehicle ............................... 76Driving safety systems ....................... 76Protection against theft ..................... 86

45

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Hybrid vehicles

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor.

Important safety notes

Danger of electric shock

G DANGERThe vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

When towing a vehicle after an accident, besure to observe the following sections:RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 437)RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised(Y page 437)RTowing a vehicle with both axles on theground (Y page 436)

Read the safety instructions on towing andtow-starting (Y page 435).

All components of the hybrid system aremarked with yellow warning stickers thatwarn you of the danger of high voltage. Thecables of the vehicle's high-voltage electricalsystem are orange in color.The ignition must be switched off when car-rying out general tasks, such as addingwasher fluid to the windshield washer systemor checking the coolant level.

Automatic deactivation of the hybridsystem

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi-vidual restraint system components may betriggered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This couldaffect Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltageelectrical systemmay also not be deactivatedas intended in the event of an accident. Youcould suffer an electric shock if you touch thedamaged components of the vehicle's high-

46 Hybrid vehiclesSafety

voltage electrical system. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Immediately switch off the ignitionand remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock after an accident.

If components of the restraint system areactivated during an accident, the hybrid sys-tem is automatically deactivated.The hybrid system is not activated when thevehicle is started if:Ra short circuit is detected in the hybrid sys-tem.Rone of the hybrid system’s electrical con-nections is disconnected.

This ensures that you do not come into con-tact with high voltage.

Manual deactivation of the hybrid sys-temThe hybrid system can be deactivated man-ually using the high voltage switch-off device.

! To prevent damage to the hybrid systemplease observe the following instructions:Ronly deactivate the hybrid system man-ually in the following situations.Rwork on the hybrid system may only becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop, even when it has been deactivatedmanually.

Rif the 6 restraint system warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up after anaccident.Rif the vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after anaccident, and the restraint system compo-nents were not activated.Rif the vehicle is badly damaged and has tobe towed or transported.

X If possible, move the vehicle out of thedanger zone: shift the automatic transmis-sion into position N.

X Release the electric parking brake.X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park itsafely.Get assistance from others if necessary.i The vehicle is locked automatically whenthe ignition is switched on and the wheelsare turning. There is therefore a risk ofbeing locked out if the vehicle is beingpushed or tested on a dynamometer.

X Switch the ignition off.X Shift the automatic transmission to parkposition P (Y page 197).Depress the electric parking brake(Y page 222).Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 466).

X To use the high-voltage switch-offdevice: open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 377).X Remove the right-hand paneling in thetrunk.

X Press release clip: in the direction of thearrow and pull it out.

X Pull the high voltage switch-off device;apart until it engages in the stop position.

If the hybrid systemhas been deactivated dueto reasons mentioned above, have it checkedat a qualified specialist workshop beforereactivation.

Hybrid vehicles 47

Safety

Z

High-voltage battery

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehi-cle standing idle for lengthy periods candamage the high-voltage battery.Hybrid vehicles: if the vehicle is idle forlengthy periods, run it for a few minutesonce every six weeks to charge up the high-voltage battery. During the charging proc-ess, switch off all electrical consumers, e.g.the automatic climate control or the seatheating.Plug-in hybrid vehicles: if the vehicle isidle for lengthy periods leave the high-volt-age battery connected to a charging sta-tion.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 209).

Engine compartmentBefore opening the hood:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to parkposition P.

X Switch the ignition off.X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock (Y page 189).

orX If the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock: remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

X Observe the warning notes on the risk ofelectric shock (Y page 46).

X Observe the warning notices about thehood (Y page 404).

RBS driving safety system (Recupera-tive Brake System)The Recuperative Braking System supportsyou when braking with an electronically-con-trolled brake boost mode and enables therecovery of kinetic energy (recuperation).

G WARNINGIf the Recuperative Braking System malfunc-tions, braking resistance may be reduced andbrake pedal travel may be longer than usual. Ifyou subsequently depress the brake pedal asusual, the braking effectmay not be sufficient.There is a risk of an accident.In the event of this malfunction, continue todepress the brake pedal. Stop the vehicle inaccordance with the traffic conditions. If nec-essary, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

Further information about the RecuperativeBraking System (Y page 276).

48 Hybrid vehiclesSafety

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Restraint system: introductionThe restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle's interior in the event of anaccident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systems

The components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 53)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 121).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 120).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 56).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Deployment of Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 65).For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 69).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the vehicle is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is runningAll vehicles, except hybrid vehicles:

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Hybrid vehicles:

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, indi-vidual restraint system components may betriggered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This couldaffect Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltageelectrical systemmay also not be deactivatedas intended in the event of an accident. Youcould suffer an electric shock if you touch thedamaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Immediately switch off the ignitionand remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock after an accident.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp; are part of the Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS).The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF: lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-

50 Occupant safetySafety

ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON; lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be deactivated or enabled;see the following points. You must make sureof this both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant Clas-sification System (OCS)" (Y page 59) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 69).There youwill also find instructions on rear-ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-tems on the front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 59). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 51) and "Air bags"(Y page 56). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rearRBelt bags for the outer seat belts in the rear,depending on the vehicle's equipment

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-cle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provinces

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Even where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGObjects next to the front seat that block thebelt buckle or the moving belt anchorage onthe front seat impair the function of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices. The EmergencyTensioning Devicesmay not function as inten-ded and the seat belt may no longer providethe intended protection. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Before starting the journey, make sure thatthere are no objects around the belt buckle orbetween the front seat and door.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-

tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the belt bags for the outer seatbelts in the rear (Y page 53)Ralways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual(Y page 69) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 59)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or

52 Occupant safetySafety

fail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any suchmodifications could invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 51).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnant

women. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 372).

Rear beltbags

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 56).

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theouter rear seat belts are equipped with a beltbag. This can be seen from the BELTBAG iden-tification on the rear seat belt.

G WARNINGIn an accident, the belt bag may damage anon-approved child restraint system. As aresult, the child restraint system may not beable to provide the intended level of protec-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.For this reason, a child restraint system withan integrated seat belt should always beinstalled using LATCH-type (ISOFIX). In a vehi-cle with optional belt bags for the rear seats,you should only ever use a booster seat withintegrated backrest that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz in conjunction

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

with a belt bag.Never use a seat belt equippedwith a belt bag to secure a forward or rear-ward-facing child restraint system or a boos-ter seat that has not been approved. For infor-mation on approved child restraint systems,please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Further information on child restraint sys-tems (Y page 69).

When triggered, belt bags: open, increas-ing the protected area of the occupants' ribc-ages. The beltbags are triggered dependingon the type and severity of the accident.

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 51) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 53).

X Adjust the seat (Y page 120).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightenedautomatically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 55).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of theshoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release: andslide the belt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release: in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt outlet engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be foundunder "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 69).

54 Occupant safetySafety

Rear seat belt buckle extendersThe seat belt extender is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. It isused on the outer rear seats.Always ensure that it is possible to move thebelt buckle freely. Always stow objects in thevehicle correctly.To assist you in finding the seat belt buckleand fastening the seat belt:Rthe belt buckle moves forwards to a con-venient positionRthe belt buckle is illuminatedAfter the seat belt is fastened, the belt bucklereturns to its normal position. The seat beltthen lies tight across the lap and thorax areas.Incorporation into the PRE-SAFE® system:the belt buckle is lowered quickly in certainhazardous situations. This pre-tensions theseat belt.Incorporation into the automatic meas-ures after the accident: in this situation, thebelt buckle is illuminated and extended aftera rear door is opened.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off using COMAND. Information onswitching the belt adjustment function on andoff can be found in the Digital Operator'sManual or in the separateCOMANDoperatinginstructions.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all occupantsmust fasten their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there maybe a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belthas already been fastened, the7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for six seconds eachtime the engine is started. If, aftersix seconds, the driver or front-passengerseat belt has not been fastened and the doorsare closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a frontdoor is opened again, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftersix seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 355).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat

belt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 65).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-

56 Occupant safetySafety

wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated (Y page 50).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 59) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 69) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-

ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for theoccupants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsinform you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 50).Front-passenger front air bag; will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 59).The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit (Y page 60)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer-ing column. The driver's knee bag is alwaysdeployed along with the driver's front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occu-pant in the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. It also offersadditional pelvis protection for occupants inthe front seats. However, it does not protectthe:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-ing situations:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

58 Occupant safetySafety

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 65).

Cushion air bags

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 56).

The rear reclining seat is equipped with acushion air bag. If the seat backrest isreclined, the cushion air bag can provide addi-tional occupant protection in the event offrontal collision situations. When triggered,the cushion air bag deploys under the seatcushion. This helps prevent the occupantfrom slipping off the seat cushion.

G WARNINGIf a child restraint system is installed and theseat backrest is reclined too far backwards,the cushion air bag may deploy by mistake inthe event of an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.

When using a child restraint system, alwaysensure that the seat is correctly adjusted andthat the backrest is almost vertical.

If you install a child restraint system on therear reclining seat, always observe:Rthe instructions and safety notes in "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 69)Rthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled ordeactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning of

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

the child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seatcushion length. The entire base of the childrestraint systemmust always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forwards-facing child restraintsystemmust, as far as possible, be resting onthe backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsmust light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front air bag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF: lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. It will then not be deployed in the eventof an accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON; lights up: thefront-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontair bag is deployed.

If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, anair bag displaymessage appears in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 332). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andPASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront air bag both before and during the jour-ney.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

60 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bagmay deploy in an accident. The child could bestruck by the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa rearward-facing child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat. You can find moreinformation on OCS under "Problemswith theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 64).

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON is lit up

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulderbelt guide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed forwardsand downwards from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle beltsash guide and the front-passenger seataccordingly. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to 12 months old in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis deactivated.But in the case of a 12-month-old child in astandard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up per-manently after the system self-test. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is activated. The result of the classifi-cation is dependent on, among other fac-tors, the child restraint system and thechild's stature. It is recommended that youinstall the child restraint system on a suit-able rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), either the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on theresult of the classification.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person of smaller stature can siton a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front air bagis activated.

Occupant safety 61

Safety

Z

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 69).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

62 Occupant safetySafety

facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamp display the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 60).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 64).

Occupant safety 63

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 62).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 59).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied by theweight of a child upto 12 months old in achild restraint sys-tem

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos-sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

64 Occupant safetySafety

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may also

be released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but itmay cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 50)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear compartment are triggered independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.

Occupant safety 65

Safety

Z

Vehicles with belt bags: the belt bags arealso deployed depending on the type andseverity of the accident.Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: theEmergency Tensioning Device is only trig-gered if the belt buckle tongue is engaged inthe belt buckle.If the seat backrest is reclined, the cushion airbag will also be deployed depending on thetype and severity of the accident.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi-cator lamp is lit. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(Y page 50).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of pro-pellant gas if a second deployment thresholdis reached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or that the vehicle is rolling over,the relevant restraint system components areactivated independently of one anotherdepending on the apparent type of accident.If the systemdetermines a need for additionalprotection for the vehicle occupants, theEmergency Tensioning Devices are triggered.RSide impact air bags on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency Tension-ing Device and the use of the seat belt onthe driver's seat and outer seats in the sec-ond row

66 Occupant safetySafety

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys in the fol-lowing situations:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of theseat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger seat is occupiedRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptive measures to protect thevehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of per-sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci-dent cannot be eliminated. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severelyRvehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: when a driver assistance system inter-venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys-tem detects an imminent danger of colli-sion in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the side win-dows are closed so that only a small gapremains.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it isin an unfavorable position.Rfor vehicles with electrically adjustable rearseats: the outer rear seats are adjusted ifthey are in an unfavorable position.Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the airpressure in the side bolsters of the seatbackrest is increased.Rvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seatbelts of the outer rear seats are pre-ten-sioned.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul-ticontour seats, the air pressure in the side

Occupant safety 67

Safety

Z

bolsters is reduced again. All settings madeby PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Infor-mation about the convenience function canbe found under "Belt adjustment"(Y page 55).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicleoccupants.

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE®PLUS intervenes.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if thevehicle is backing up.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform brakingactions while the vehicle is in motion or whenParking Guidance is active.

Function

PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following meas-ures depending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seatbelts are pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that arear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if thedriver applies the brakes when the vehi-cle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application iscanceled:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed whena gear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-ger detectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intentionto pull away

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, the original settingsare restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup-ply is cut offRvehicles with seat belt extenders: the seat-belt buckles for the outer rear seats areilluminated and extend forwards

68 Occupant safetySafety

Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency callRvehicles with the hybrid drive system: thehybrid system and the high-voltage electri-cal system are deactivated

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 59)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 51) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 53).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a heightwhere a lap/shoulder belt can be fastenedproperly without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Children in the vehicle 69

Safety

Z

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retrac-tor ensures that the seat belt will not slackenonce the child restraint system has beensecured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system downso that the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the release button on the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 372).

70 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 59). There youwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

Vehicles with seat belt extenders: whensecuring a child in a child restraint system ona rear seat, observe the following instruc-tions:Rmake sure that the seat belt on the childrestraint system is fastened according tothe manufacturer's installation instruc-tions for the child restraint system.Rfor child restraint systems with a beltclamp: engage the belt tongue in the bucklebefore you tighten the seat belt using thebelt clamp.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat: wheninstalling a child restraint system, move therear reclining seat backrest to an almost ver-tical position. The rear reclining seat backrestmust rest against the child restraint system.Observe the notes on the cushion air bag(Y page 59).Vehicles with belt bags: only use a childrestraint system which has been approved byMercedes-Benz. Always observe the instruc-tions and safety notes on belt bags for theouter seat belts in the rear (Y page 53).

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Children in the vehicle 71

Safety

Z

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings; on therear seats are covered by a Velcro-fastenedupholstered lining:.X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat:adjust the rear reclining seat backrestdown a little before installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.

X Vehicles without rear reclining seat:fold upholstered lining: upwards.

X Vehicles with a rear reclining seat:remove upholstered lining:.

X Vehicles without a rear reclining seat:turn the support on the rear side of uphol-stered lining: by 90°.Upholstered lining: remains foldedupwards.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings;.

X Vehicleswith a rear reclining seat:movethe rear reclining seat backrest to anupright position. The rear reclining seat

backrest must rest against the childrestraint system.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

Vehicles without rear reclining seat: afteryou have removed the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, you must turn the sup-port on the rear side of upholstered lining:by 90° again. Then fold upholstery lining:down.ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings; for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings; for the LATCH-type(ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessi-ble.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

72 Children in the vehicleSafety

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

G WARNINGVehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats:If you adjust the seat after installing a childrestraint system:Rthe seat belt could slacken or become tootightRthe child restraint system could becomeloose, incorrectly positioned or damaged

As a result, the child restraint systemmay notbe able to provide the intended level of pro-tection. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Never adjust the seat after installing the childrestraint system.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunction

display in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

The Top Tether anchorage points are installedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move the head restraint upwards.X Fold up cover: of the Top Tether anchor-age.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt? under the headrestraint between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook= of Top Tetherbelt? into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether belt? is nottwisted.

Children in the vehicle 73

Safety

Z

X Tension Top Tether belt?. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Fold down cover: of the Top Tetheranchorage.

X If necessary, move the head restraint backdown again slightly (Y page 133). Makesure that you do not interfere with the cor-rect routing of Top Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install the child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "OccupantClassificationSystem(OCS)" (Y page 59).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 50)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.

Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entirebase of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must nottouch the roof or be subjected to a load by thehead restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strapmust be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt outlet. If neces-sary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and thefront-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

74 Children in the vehicleSafety

Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 75)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 75)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp: is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Children in the vehicle 75

Safety

Z

When the override feature is activated, thecontrols in the rear compartment are disabledfor:Rthe rear side windowsRadjustment of the front-passenger seatfrom the rear compartmentRthe sunblinds:

- of the rear side windows- of the rear window- in the roof

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 76)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 77)RBASPLUS (BrakeAssistSystemPLUS)withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 77)

RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(distance warning function and AdaptiveBrake Assist) (Y page 79)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 81)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 83)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 84)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 84)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 86)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for maintainingthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weather condi-tions and maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 442).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.

76 Driving safety systemsSafety

The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 358) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 317).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, evenwhen you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a cam-era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicle

Driving safety systems 77

Safety

Z

In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-cal characteristics such as the body contoursand posture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functionsare restricted or no longer available. Thebrake system is still available with completebrake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 78).

BAS PLUS can help you tominimize the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-sor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

78 Driving safety systemsSafety

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the last possi-ble moment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-fic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobjects crossing your path and that arerecognized in the detection range of thesensors

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous braking function and adaptiveBrake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimize the risk of a front-endcollision with a vehicle ahead or reduce theeffects of such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 188).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Driving safety systems 79

Safety

Z

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 76).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 309).

If the distance warning function is not activa-ted, theæ symbol appears in the assis-tance graphics display.The distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you ifyou rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentThe autonomous braking function is availablein the following speed ranges:Rfrom 5 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 5 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

80 Driving safety systemsSafety

If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, the

brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been detected as such at least onceover the period of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts tostationary obstacles.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.

Driving safety systems 81

Safety

Z

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the noteson ESP® (Y page 437) when towing the vehi-cle with a raised rear axle.ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 360) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 317).

Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

82 Driving safety systemsSafety

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate: (Y page 82).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: (Y page 82).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Crosswind Assist (vehicles withoutMAGIC BODY CONTROL)

General informationVehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL: infor-mation on stabilizing the vehicle in the eventof crosswind (Y page 243).Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle todeviate from a straight course. The crosswinddriving assistance function integrated intoESP® significantly reduces these effects.ESP® intervenes automatically according tothe direction and intensity of the crosswindsaffecting your vehicle.ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when drivingstraight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isdeactivated or disabled because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Driving safety systems 83

Safety

Z

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 358) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 320).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 242) andhill start assist (Y page 192).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Pay attention to the important safetynotes in the "Driving safety systems" sec-tion (Y page 76).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehi-cles with the Driving Assistance package.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system and the camerasystem must be switched on and be opera-tional.With the help of the radar sensor system andthe camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake candetect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-cle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standingupright.Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 84).PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected arisk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automatic brak-ing.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h)

At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE®Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

84 Driving safety systemsSafety

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 309).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the·distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performeduntil immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.

Driving safety systems 85

Safety

Z

The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided in partic-ular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrake.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 76).

No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the engine if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hood

86 Protection against theftSafety

X To turn the alarmoffwith the SmartKey:press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically sends a message tothe Customer Assistance Center. This isdone either by text message or data con-nection. The emergency call system sendsthe message or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Protection against theft 87

Safety

Z

88

Useful information .............................. 90SmartKey ............................................. 90Doors .................................................... 97Trunk .................................................. 100Side windows .................................... 106Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................... 110

89

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

Do not keep the SmartKey in the tempera-ture-controlled cup holder (Y page 380). Onvehicles with the KEYLESS-GO start function,do not keep it on the parcel shelf or in thetrunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not bedetected, e.g. when starting the engine usingthe Start/Stop button.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

90 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armedagain.

X To lock centrally: press button:.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.

i You can also set an audible signal to con-firm that the vehicle has been locked. Theaudible signal can be activated and deacti-vated using COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

i When the surround lighting is activated inCOMAND, it comes on when it is dark afterthe vehicle is unlocked using the remotecontrol. Information on activating anddeactivating the surround lighting can befound in the separate operating instruc-tions.

X To open the trunk lid automaticallyfrom outside the vehicle: press and holdbutton; until the trunk lid opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.The driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Whenlocking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, thedistance between the SmartKey and the cor-responding door handle must not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESSRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

SmartKey 91

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face: or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 108).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.

DeactivatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for alonger period of time, you can deactivate KEY-LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit-tle power, thereby conserving battery power.For the purposes of activation/deactivation,the vehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKeylights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO isdeactivated.

X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey or insert the SmartKey into theignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start functionBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is aSmartKey in the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 94).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-

92 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 94).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 86).If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 98)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 105)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 99)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 94).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:

opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing first andthen press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart-Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

94 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 94) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 94).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 94) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 94).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Lock (Y page 98) or unlock (Y page 99) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 430).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 432).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theStart/Stop button. TheSmartKey is in the vehi-cle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 94) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 94).

If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

96 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 372).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 75). If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,opening a door from the inside will trigger theanti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 86).

X To unlock and open a front door: pulldoor handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull door han-dle;.Locking knob: pops up and the doorunlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;again.The door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The buttons are located onboth front doors.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

Doors 97

Openingandclosing

Z

If the driver's door is open, the door staysunlocked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 75).If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-Key orwith KEYLESS-GO, opening a door fromthe inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 86).

i If a locked door is opened from the inside,the previous unlock status of the vehiclewill be taken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlocked. If only thedriver's door had been previouslyunlocked, only the door which has beenopened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

i You can switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

Power closingPower closing pulls the doors and trunk lidinto their locks automatically even if they areonly partly closed.X To power close a door: push the door intothe lock up to the first detent position.Power closing will pull the door fully closed.

X To power close the trunk lid: lightly pushthe trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunklid closed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,use the mechanical key.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

98 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanicalkey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm

system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 86).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 97).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

X Insert the mechanical key as far as it will gointo opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the mechanicalkey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

Doors 99

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driv-er's door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i You can limit the opening angle of thetrunk lid in COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 495).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 372).

Obstacle recognition with trunk lidreversing featureOn vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-ture, the trunk lid is equipped with automaticobstacle recognition with reversing feature. Ifa solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lidwhen automatically opening or closing, thisprocedure is stopped. If the trunk lid is stop-ped during the closing procedure, it will openagain automatically. The automatic obstaclerecognition with reversing feature is only anaid. It is not a substitute for your attentive-ness when opening and closing the trunk lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.

100 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey.orX Pull handle:.The trunk lid opens.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.Vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature or power closing:

X Lightly push the trunk lid closed.The power closing function pulls the trunklid closed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the&button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91).

i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked. It thenopens again.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

Trunk 101

Openingandclosing

Z

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 495).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

ClosingYou can close the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the closing button inthe trunk lid.

X Press and release closing button: on thetrunk lid.

orX If the SmartKey is located in the immediatevicinity of the vehicle: press theF but-ton on the SmartKey.You can release the button as soon as thetrunk lid starts to close.

X To stop the closing process:RPress theF button on the SmartKey,orRPull the trunk lid handle, or

RPress closing button: or locking but-ton; on the trunk lid, orRPress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door, orRIn vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:kick into the sensor detection rangeunder the bumper with your foot.i If theF button on the SmartKey ispressed or HANDS-FREE ACCESS is initi-ated after the closing process is stopped,the trunk lid opens.

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature and KEYLESS-GO: when all thedoors are closed, you can simultaneouslyclose the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. Thekeymust be located to the rear of the vehicle.X Press and release locking button; on thetrunk lid.If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outsidethe vehicle, the trunk lid closes and thevehicle locks.i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid opens again after it isclosed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKeyoutside the vehicle, the trunk lid remainsclosed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking move-ment within the detection range of sensors.

102 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREEACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lidor stop the procedure without using yourhands. This is useful if you have your handsfull. To do this, make a kicking movementunder the bumper with your foot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson. The KEYLESS-GO key must be inthe rear detection range of the vehicle.RWhenmaking the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clear-ance to the rear of the vehicle. You couldotherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kick-ingmovementwithin the detection range ofsensors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Oth-erwise, the sensors may not function cor-rectly.

RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND-FREEACCESS could be triggered. The trunklid could thus be opened or closed unin-tentionally, for example, if you:- sit on the edge of the trunk.- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle.

- move the charging cable through thedetection range of the sensors.

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key aboutyour person in these situations or in situa-tions similar to these. This will prevent theunintentional opening/closing of the trunk.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with aprosthetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.You will hear a warning tone while the trunklid is opening or closing.

X If the trunk lid does not open after sev-eral attempts: wait at least ten secondsthen move your leg under the bumper onceagain.i If you hold your foot under the bumper fortoo long, the trunk lid does not open or

Trunk 103

Openingandclosing

Z

close. Repeat the leg movement morequickly if this occurs.

To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rkick with your leg in the sensor detectionrange: under the bumper orRpull the handle on the outside of the trunklid orRpress the closing button in the trunk lid orRpress theF button on the SmartKeyIf the trunk lid closing procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will open.

If the trunk lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe trunk lid will close.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i The opening dimensions of the trunk lidcan be found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 495).

Opening and closing

You can open and close the trunk lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press remote operating switchfor trunk lid: until the trunk lid is com-pletely closed.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.

104 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Activating the function to lock the trunk sep-arately:X Close the trunk lid.X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, thetrunk remains locked.i You can also lock the glove box(Y page 373).

Deactivating the function to lock the trunkseparately:X Open the glove box.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, thetrunk will also be unlocked.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk lid can no longer be unlocked:Rusing the SmartKey, orRusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS, orRusing the remote operating switch in thedoor control panel:Use the emergency release.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 86).

X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 93).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go toposition2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can unlock the trunk lid from the insidewith the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.

Trunk 105

Openingandclosing

Z

The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-nected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from trav-eling upwards during automatic operation,the side window opens again automatically.During the manual closing process, the sidewindow only opens again automatically afterthe corresponding switch is released. Theautomatic reversing feature is only an aid andis no substitute for your attention when clos-ing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

106 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To close fully: pull the correspondingswitch beyond the pressure point.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.i If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance and release, automatic opera-tion is started in the corresponding direc-tion. You can stop automatic operation bypressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This functionremains active for five minutes or until youopen a front door.

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 75), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

i Before opening or closing the side win-dows, a check is carried out to see whethera valid SmartKey is in the vehicle, if:Ra side window switch is pressed or pulledandRthe Start/Stop button is used instead ofthe SmartKey in the ignition lockandRthe engine is not runningThis is carried out by means of a brief radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey.

i Information on opening and closing theroller sunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 381).

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving.If the SmartKey is in close proximity to thevehicle, the convenience opening function isavailable.To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the panorama roof with

Side windows 107

Openingandclosing

Z

power tilt/sliding panel are in the desiredposition.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

i Notes on the automatic reversing featurefor:Rthe side window (Y page 106)Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel (Y page 111)Rthe roller sunblinds (Y page 112)

Using the SmartKeyX Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle. Allthe doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblinds

108 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

of the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-ing panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 106).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 106).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remainsclosed after the button is released, then ithas been set correctly. If this is not thecase, repeat the steps above again.

Side windows 109

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notesIn the following section, the term "sliding sun-roof" refers to the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

110 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypush the sliding sunroof switch up or pull itback. The sliding sunroof raises at the rear.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

! When the sliding sunroof is open, watercan get into the vehicle and cause damage.The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior. Only cleanthe sliding sunroof when it is closed.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is no substitute foryour attention when closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press or pull the3 switchbeyond the point of resistance, automatic

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 111

Openingandclosing

Z

operation is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic opera-tion by pressing or pulling again.

i If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear,it lowers slightly automatically at higherspeeds. The noise level in the vehicle inte-rior is reduced as a result.At low speeds it raises again automatically.You can also temporarily deactivate auto-matic lowering. To do so, press the3switch. The sliding sunroof raises againautomatically.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

i The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if aroof carrier is installed. In order to allowventilation of the vehicle interior, you canraise the sliding sunroof.If contact is made with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the slidingsunroof lowers slightly but remains raisedat the rear .

i Before opening, raising or closing the slid-ing sunroof, a check is carried out to seewhether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle,if:Rthe3 switch is pressed or pulledandRthe Start/Stop button is used instead ofthe SmartKey in the ignition lockandRthe engine is not runningThis is carried out by means of a brief radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey.

Rain-closing featureThe raised sliding sunroof automatically low-ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain.The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rain.You can manually cancel the automatic clos-ing procedure. Press or pull the3 switchin any direction.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:. The rain-closingfeature remains activated.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thesliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The front roller sunblind canonly be opened and closed when the slidingsunroof is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a roller sunblind during theclosing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. The automatic reversing

112 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

feature is only an aid and is not a substitutefor your attention when closing the roller sun-blinds.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects such assmall fingers. This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone being trap-ped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Openingandclosing the front roller sun-blind

: Opens; Opens= Closes

i The front roller sunblind can only beclosed when the sliding sunroof is closed.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Press the3 switch in direction:.The front roller sunblind opens, then thesliding roof is raised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.

The front roller sunblind opens.X Pull the3 switch in direction=.The front roller sunblind closes if the slidingsunroof is closed.i If you press or pull the3 switchbeyond the point of resistance, automaticoperation is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic opera-tion by pressing or pulling again.

Opening and closing the rear roller sun-blind

Operating from the front

Vehicles without MAGIC SKY CONTROL:you can operate the rear roller sunblind fromthe front.X To open or close: press button:.The rear roller sunblind opens or closesfully.

X To stop: press button: again.i Youmust first open or close the rear rollersunblind fully before you can move it in theother direction.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 113

Openingandclosing

Z

Operating from the rear compartment

X To open/close manually: press or pullswitch: to the point of resistance andhold it until the rear roller sunblind hasreached the desired position.

X To open/close fully: press or pullswitch: beyond the point of resistanceand release it.i If you press switch: again when the rearroller sunblind is fully opened, the degree oftransparency of the rear MAGIC SKY CON-TROL element changes. If you pullswitch: again when the rear roller sun-blind is fully closed, the degree of trans-parency changes only when the roller sun-blind is opened (Y page 114).

i If the rear roller sunblind closes when therear MAGIC SKY CONTROL element is nottinted, this tints automatically.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, thetransparency of which can be changed byapplying electrical voltage.MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switchedbetween darkened and transparent states.

i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automat-ically after a short period when you turn theSmartKey to position 0 or remove it.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the headliner is damaged orremoved, electrical components will beexposed. If you touch these components, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk offatal injury.RNever remove the headliner.RIf the headliner is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-TROL carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The high-voltage components of MAGIC SKYCONTROL are protected behind the head-liner.These are in the hidden portion of the mova-ble roof element of the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and above the leftrear door.The MAGIC SKY CONTROL voltage trans-former is stamped with a high-voltage sym-bol, warning you about the high voltage. Theelectric cables of the high-voltage section arecolor orange.

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL fromthe front

114 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-tus it was set to before the engine wasswitched off.

X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.

If the rearMAGIC SKYCONTROL element is ina different state than the front element, thedegree of transparencywill change only in thefront element. Both elements will then be inthe same state and any further changes willagain occur synchronously.

i At sub-zero temperatures, the change isslower and uneven. The entire processmaytake some time.

Operating the rear MAGIC SKY CON-TROL element from the rear

X To change the degree of transparencyof the fully opened roller sunblind: pressswitch:.

X To change the degree of transparencyof the fully closed roller sunblind: pullswitch:.The degree of transparency will changeonly after the roller sunblind is opened.i If the rear roller sunblind closes when therear MAGIC SKY CONTROL element is nottinted, this tints automatically.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and theroller sunblind

Resetting the sliding sunroof or thefront roller sunblinds

Reset the sliding sunroof or the front rollersunblind if the sliding sunroof or the frontroller sunblind does not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow:until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the3 switch in the direction ofarrow: repeatedly until the front rollersunblind is closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof(Y page 111) and the front roller sunblind(Y page 113) can be fully opened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 115

Openingandclosing

Z

Resetting the rear sunblind

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Pull switch: repeatedly until the rearroller sunblind is fully closed.

X Keep switch: pulled for an additionalsecond.

X Make sure that the rear roller sunblind canbe opened fully again (Y page 113).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

116 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-ture.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 117

Openingandclosing

Z

118

Useful information ............................ 120Correct driver's seat position .......... 120Seats .................................................. 121Steering wheel .................................. 137Mirrors ............................................... 140Memory function ............................... 143Memory function in the rear com-partment ............................................ 144

119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 121).

X Check whether you have adjusted seat=properly (Y page 122).

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 137).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly (Y page 137).

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 51).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 54).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

120 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 141).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 144).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".

Seats 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Adjusting the seats

Vehicles with standard head restraintsor luxury head restraints

: Head restraint height; Head restraint height= Seat height? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position (Y page 67).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 144).

i To ensure the largest possible range ofseat settings, certain seat adjustment func-tions will automatically activate other seatadjustment functions.

i The head restraint height is adjustedautomatically when you adjust the seatheight or the seat fore-and-aft position.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxuryhead restraint

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Seat height? Seat cushion angleA Seat cushion lengthB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentC Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfavora-ble position (Y page 67).

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 144).

i To ensure the largest possible range ofseat settings, certain seat adjustment func-tions will automatically activate other seatadjustment functions.

i The head restraint height is adjustedautomatically when you adjust the seatheight or the seat fore-and-aft position.

122 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically whenyou adjust the backrest.

Adjusting the rear seat

Adjusting the rear seat

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and lengthA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthYou can only adjust the outer seats in the rearelectrically.

Adjusting a rear reclining seat

: Head restraint height; Head restraint fore-and-aft position= Backrest angle? Combined seat cushion angle and lengthA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Legrest angleC Legrest length

The rear reclining seat is only available in longwheelbase vehicles equipped with "executiveseats". On vehicles without a rear recliningseat the button for setting the angle andlength of the legrest has no function.Vehicleswith a longwheelbase: depending onthe vehicle equipment, the rear reclining seatis either only on the front-passenger side oralso on the driver's side.S-Class Maybach: the rear reclining seat is onthe driver's and the front-passenger side.Vehicles with a long wheelbase and a "Rearcompartment chauffeur/memory package"also have a footrest. This is located on thelower part of the front-passenger seat back-rest (Y page 124).The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this isthe case fold up the legrest and engage it.

Setting the reclined position

This function is only availablewith longwheel-base vehicles.You can use the override button to disablethis function (Y page 75).X Press and hold button: until the seat hasreached the reclined position.The rear seat moves into the reclined posi-tion, the front-passenger seat moves intothe chauffeur position (Y page 127). Thefootrest moves out from under the front-passenger seat.

Seats 123

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

You can exit the reclined position andadjust the seat position by:Rcalling up a stored position using mem-ory buttons 1 or 2 (Y page 144)Rmanually adjusting the seat to thedesired position (Y page 122).i The steps for setting the reclined positionare not always carried out simultaneously.

The legrest folds down if overloaded. If this isthe case fold up the legrest and engage it.

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the driver’s seat

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! Do not move the front-passenger seatfully forwards if there are objects in the

parcel net in the front-passenger footwell.The objects could otherwise be damaged.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

X To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.

When the indicator lamp in button: lightsup, for the front-passenger seat you canadjust:Radjust the seat (Y page 122)Rseat heating (Y page 134)Rseat ventilation (Y page 136)Rthe memory function to call up or save set-tings (Y page 143).

Adjusting the front-passenger seatfrom the rear

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

124 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 56) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 69).

G WARNINGThe front-air bags for could also injure thevehicle occupants in the front If the frontseats are positioned too close to the dash-board or steering wheel. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always adjust the front seats so that they areas far from the front air bags as possible. Alsoobserve the notes on the correct adjustmentof the seats.

! Do not move the front-passenger seatfully forwards if there are objects in theparcel net in the front-passenger footwell.The objects could otherwise be damaged.

i You can use the rear-compartment over-ride button to disable the setting of thefront-passenger seat from the rear(Y page 75).

Adjusting the rear seat

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position

? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toB.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Backrest angle? Seat heightA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toA.

Seats 125

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the rear seat on vehicles withEASY ADJUST luxury head restraints

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat with buttons; toB.

Adjusting the front-passenger seat onvehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraints

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angle

A Seat heightB Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toB.

EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints are avail-able individually on vehicles equipped with arear compartment chauffeur/memory pack-age.

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur modeand long wheelbase

Adjusting the rear seat

: Selects rear-compartment seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Combined seat cushion angle and lengthB Combined seat cushion angle and lengthC Longitudinal direction of the legrest if rear

reclining seat is installedD Angle of the legrest if rear reclining seat is

installedX To select the rear seat: press button:repeatedly until the indicator lamp in thebutton is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seats with buttons; toD.

126 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the front-passenger seat

: Selects the front-passenger seat; Head restraint height= Head restraint fore-and-aft position? Backrest angleA Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentB Seat heightC FootrestX To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat with but-tons; toC.

The footrest can only be adjusted if:Rthe front-passenger seat is moved fullyforwardRthe front-passenger seat is in the positionfor chauffeur mode (Y page 127).

i The front-passenger seat in the S-ClassMaybach must not be positioned fully for-wards when adjusting the footrest. Thefront-passenger seat must be moved for-wards from the rear to the middle adjust-ment range.

Chauffeur mode

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is in chauffeurmode and the front-passenger head restraintis folded down, the view of the passenger-sideexterior mirror can be impaired. There is a riskof an accident.To have a free view of the exterior mirror,remove the front-passenger head restraint.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

General notesIn chauffeur mode:Rthe front-passenger seat ismoved forwardsRthe backrest is tilted forwardsRthe head restraint is folded forwardsThe front-passenger seat automaticallymoves from the chauffeur position back intothe normal position if:Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted usingthe seat adjustment switch on the front-passenger doorRthe front-passenger seat belt is fastenedRan occupant is detected on the front-passenger seat

Seats 127

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rthe front-passenger seat head restraint isinserted and the ignition is switched onRthe front-passenger seat backrest ismovedbackwards or the seat is moved in a longi-tudinal direction out of the chauffeur area(Y page 130).

Positioning the front-passenger seat forchauffeur mode

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 127). Adjust the seat for chauffeurmode before the journey (Y page 128). Do notremove the front-passenger seat headrestraint during the journey.

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disablethis function (Y page 75).In order for the front-passenger seat to bepositioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe SmartKey must be in the ignition lockand in position 1 or 2 (Y page 189)Rthe front-passenger seat may not be occu-piedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forwards and hold it in thisposition.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the areafor chauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until thefront-passenger seat is in position forchauffeur mode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forwards. The seat movesforward.The ToTo viewview thethe ext.ext. mirror,mirror, adjustadjustfront-passengerfront-passenger seatseat oror removeremove thetheheadhead restraint.restraint.message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 352).i If the front-passenger seat is already atthe threshold to the area for the chauffeurmode, the position for the chauffeur modeis set immediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode can besaved or set using the memory function ofthe rear seat (Y page 145). For this theindicator lamp on button: must be lit.

Adjusting from the driver's seat

128 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

In order for the front-passenger seat to bepositioned in chauffeur mode:Rthe SmartKey must be in the ignition lockand in position 1 or 2 (Y page 189)Rthe front-passenger seat may not be occu-piedRthe front-passenger seat belt must not beinserted into the buckle

X To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button; forward and hold it.The seat moves forward.The seat stops at the threshold of the areafor chauffeur mode.

X Release button;.X Press and hold button; again until thefront-passenger seat is in position forchauffeur mode.The head restraint on the front-passengerseat folds forwards. The seat movesforward.The ToTo viewview thethe ext.ext. mirror,mirror, adjustadjustfront-passengerfront-passenger seatseat oror removeremove thetheheadhead restraint.restraint.message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 352).i If the front-passenger seat is already atthe threshold to the area for the chauffeurmode, the position for the chauffeur modeis set immediately.

i The position for chauffeur mode cannotbe stored or set with the driver's seat mem-ory function.

Installing/removing the head restraint

Removing

X Move the seat into the position for chauf-feur mode, until the head restraint foldsforward completely (Y page 128).

X Fold head restraint bar covers; back-wards.

X Pull adjuster lever? backwards and hold itin this position. Hold head restraint:while doing so.

X Remove head restraint:.X Release adjuster lever?.Red pin= protrudes from the adjusterlever.

X Press down red pin=.X Fold covers; forwards and close them.

Installing

X Fold covers; backwards.X Pull handle? backwards.Red pin= protrudes from the adjusterlever.

Seats 129

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Insert head restraint: into the brackets.The head restraint must engage on bothsides.

X Press down red pin=.If the pin can be pressed down and is thenno longer visible, the head restraint hasengaged correctly.

X Fold covers; forwards and close them.The head restraint folds into position auto-matically.

Moving the front-passenger seat intothe normal position

Adjusting from the rear compartment

You can use the override button to disablethis function (Y page 75).The head restraint must be installed, in orderfor the front-passenger seat to be moved intothe normal position (Y page 129).X To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it inthis position.The front-passenger seat moves into thenormal adjustment range at the thresholdof the area for chauffeur mode. The headrestraint folds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into thenormal adjustment range at the thresholdto the area for chauffeur mode. The headrestraint folds into position.

i Further settings are available via thememory adjustment buttons, if:Ra position in the normal setting hasalready been saved.Rthe front-passenger seat has been selec-ted with button:

Adjusting from the driver's seat

The head restraint must be installed, in orderfor the front-passenger seat to be moved intothe normal position (Y page 129).X To select the front-passenger seat:press button: repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Press button= backwards and hold it inthis position.The front-passenger seat moves into thenormal adjustment range at the thresholdof the area for chauffeur mode. The headrestraint folds into position.If you continue to hold down button=, theseat continues to move backwards.

orX Briefly press button; backwards.The front-passenger seat moves into thenormal adjustment range at the threshold

130 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

to the area for chauffeur mode. The headrestraint folds into position.

i Further settings are available via thememory adjustment buttons if the front-passenger seat has been selected with but-ton:.

Adjusting from the front-passenger seatX Press any seat adjustment button.The front-passenger seat moves into thenormal adjustment range at the thresholdof the area for chauffeur mode. The headrestraint folds into position.

Fully reclined position of the front-passenger seat

AdjustingThis function is only available on vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.You can move the front-passenger seat into afully reclined position. The rear seat and front-passenger seat then provide a continuoussurface.To do so:Rmove the seat cushion of the rear seat asfar back as possible in a longitudinal direc-tion (Y page 123)Rmove the front-passenger seat into posi-tion for chauffeur mode (Y page 128)Rremove the front-passenger seat headrestraint (Y page 129)Rmove the front-passenger seat so that thebackrest is in a fully reclined position(Y page 122)

ExitingTo exit the fully reclined position:Rfold the backrest upright to a suitable posi-tionRinstall the head restraint (Y page 129)

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the front head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

General notesPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 121).Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Seats 131

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the head restraints manually

With this function you can adjust the distancebetween the head restraint and the back ofthe seat occupant's head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the luxury head restraintmechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position for-wards: pull the head restraint forwards in

the direction of arrow; until it engages inthe desired position.

X To adjust the fore-and-aft position back-wards: press and hold release button=.

X Fold the head restraint backwards in thedirection of arrow;.

X Let go of release button= once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the EASY ADJUST luxury headrestraint mechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.i The fore-and-aft position of the headrestraint is adjusted automatically whenyou adjust the seat backrest angle usingthe seat switch.

Adjusting the front head restraints elec-tricallyThe height and fore-and-aft position of thefront head restraints can be adjusted with theseat adjustment switch (Y page 122).

132 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

Lowering the rear seat head restraintselectrically from the front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.i If all of the rear seat head restraints arelowered and button: is pressed again,the outer rear head restraintsmove into thelast stored position.

Extending the outer rear seat headrestraints from the front electricallyThis function is available on vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraints have extended upwards.

Extending the outer rear head restraintsinto the last stored positionThis function is available on vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Briefly press button:.The head restraints lower.

X Briefly press button: again.The head restraints move to the last storedposition.

Adjusting the luxury head restraint in therear compartment mechanically

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the angle of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.

Adjusting the rear head restraints electri-callyThe height and fore-and-aft position of therear head restraints can be adjusted with theseat adjustment switch (Y page 123).

Supplementary cushion for luxury headrestraintsThe supplementary cushion is available onvehicles with electrically adjustable rearseats.Only use the supplementary cushion whenthe vehicle is stationary.

The supplementary cushion is located in thevehicle.

Seats 133

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The supplementary cushion is attached to thehead restraint by three press studs.Installing the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwardsas possible (Y page 123).

X Hold supplementary cushion; againstthe head restraint and push press studs:into the counterpieces.

Removing the supplementary cushion:X Position the head restraint as far forwardsas possible (Y page 123).

X Release press studs: and remove sup-plementary cushion;.

Adjusting the rear center headrestraints

Retracting and extending electrically

X Press and hold button: until the headrestraint has fully extended or retracted.

Folding into position mechanically

X Pull the head restraint up until it engages.

Adjusting the multicontour seatThe settings for the multicontour seat areonly activated if:Rthe seat is occupiedRthe seat belt is fastened.The multicontour seat can be adjusted usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Adjusting the active multicontourseatThe settings for the active multicontour seatare only activated if:Rthe seat is occupiedRthe seat belt is fastened.Vehicles installed with the Seat Comfortpackage: you can adjust the active multicon-tour seat for the driver and front passengerwith COMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Multicontour seat in the rearYou can adjust the multicontour seats for theouter seats using the remote control (see theseparate operating instructions).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportThe 4-way lumbar support can be adjustedwith COMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limited

134 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

ability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

For vehicles equipped with the Warmth Com-fort package: the armrest in the door and thecenter console can also be heated when youswitch on the seat heating of one of the frontseats. This can be set with COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.Vehicles with the Seat Heating Plus package:you can set the distribution of the heatedsections of the seat cushion and backrest onthe front seats via COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).Vehicles with the Seat Heating Plus package:you can set the distribution of the heatedsections of the seat cushion and backrest viaCOMAND (see the Digital Operator's Man-ual).Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem and electric seat adjustment: you can setthe distribution of the heated sections of therear seat cushion and backrest via the RearSeat Entertainment System (see the separateoperating instructions).

Front seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Rear seats

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 135

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can beswitched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Front seats

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the blower setting you have selected.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 107). The seatventilation of the driver's seat automati-cally switches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Rear seat

Switching the seat ventilation in the rear com-partment on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired blower setting is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

136 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation canbe switched back on.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel position(fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 139)RStoring settings (Y page 144)ROperating the on-board computer(Y page 295).

Steering wheel 137

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in thedirection of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,the steering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switchoff the ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

138 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The steering wheelheating has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.If there is a risk of becoming trapped byRthe steering wheel: move the steeringwheel adjustment lever.Rthe seat: press the switch for seat adjust-ment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function positionswitches. The adjustment process is stopped.This function is only available on vehicles withmemory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv-er's seat moves backwards if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver'sdoor; the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1 in the ignition lock (Y page 189)Ropen the driver's door when the ignition isswitched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards andthe driver's seat only moves backwards ifthe driving position is stored after seat orsteering wheel adjustment (Y page 144).

The last position of the steering wheel or seatis stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is stored with the memory func-tion (Y page 144).

Steering wheel 139

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper stop.The driver's seat onlymoves backwards if itis not already in the rearmost position.

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat for drivingThe steering wheel and the driver's seat aremoved to the previously set position if:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insertthe SmartKey into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the igni-tion is switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steering wheel and the driver's seatonly return to the last set position when thedriving position is stored after seat or steer-ing wheel adjustment (Y page 144).

The last position of the steering wheel or seatis stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is stored with the memory func-tion (Y page 144).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened or the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. This makes it easier to exit thevehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

140 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Press button; for the right-hand exteriormirror or button= for the left-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp lights up in the buttonthat has been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button: as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated if therear window defroster is switched on and theoutside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.When the AutomaticAutomatic MirrorMirror FoldingFolding func-tion is activated in COMAND (see the sepa-rate operating instructions):

Mirrors 141

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Press and hold button: until you hear aclick and the mirror engages audibly intoposition (Y page 141).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 141).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Adjustment button= Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror? Button for the driver's side exterior mirrorYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

142 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M:.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory buttonM: and one of thearrows on adjustment button; withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

Memory function 143

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Storing settingsThe memory function is only available in vehi-cles with the memory package.With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat, backrest, head restraint position andcontour of the backrest in the lumbarregionRactive multicontour seat: side bolsters ofthe backrest, shoulder of the backrest, con-tour of the backrest, dynamic function levelRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrestRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 122).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 137) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 141).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the corresponding storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until:RSeatRSteering wheelRExterior mirrorsare in the stored position.i If you release the storage position button,the seat, steering wheel and mirror settingfunctions stop immediately. The multicon-tour seat setting or the 4-way lumbar sup-port is still carried out.

Memory function in the rear compart-ment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

144 Memory function in the rear compartmentSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

General notesThe settings for the rear seat and the front-passenger seat can be stored using the rear-compartment memory function.RIf the indicator lamp in thev button isnot lit, store the rear seat settings.RIf the indicator lamp in thev buttonlights up, store the front-passenger seatand rear seat settings. Both the front-passenger and rear seat are taken intoaccount with this setting. Depending on theequipment in the vehicle, two or threememory positions can be stored for thefront-passenger and rear seats.

Storing settings

General notesWith thememory function in the rear, you canstore up to three different settings, e.g. forthree different people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRmulticontour seat: the seat cushions of thebackrest as well as the contour of the back-rest in the lumbar and shoulder regionsRseat heating: distribution of the heated sec-tions of the seat cushion and backrest if theindicator lamp in thev button is not lit.

The following settings are stored to amemoryposition, if the indicator lamp in thevbutton lights up:Rposition of the footrest for the front-passenger seat, if availableRposition of the screen, if available

Vehicles without rear reclining seat

Selects rear-compartment seatX Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 123).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

To select the front-passenger seat andrear-compartment seatX Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 123).

X Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

Memory function in the rear compartment 145

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accord-ingly (Y page 124).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seat

Selects rear-compartment seatX Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 123).

X Press theMmemory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

To select the front-passenger seat andrear-compartment seatX Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.The rear-compartment seat is selected ifthe indicator lamp in the button is not lit.

X Adjust the rear seat accordingly(Y page 123).

X Press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button lights up.The front-passenger seat is selected if theindicator lamp in the button lights up.

X Adjust the front-passenger seat accord-ingly (Y page 124).

X Press theMmemory button and then presseither the 1 or 2 memory button withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

You cannot store any settings on the buttonfor setting the reclined position.

Calling up a stored setting

General notesThe memory positions in the area for thechauffeur mode can only be set when theconditions for the chauffeurmode are fulfilled(Y page 127).

Vehicles without rear reclining seatX To call up the stored rear seat setting:press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passengerseat and rear seat settings: press buttonv repeatedly until the indicator lamp inthe button lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the rear seat orthe front-passenger seat are in the storedposition.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button.The adjustment of the multicontour seat isstill carried out.

Vehicles with a rear reclining seatX To call up the stored rear seat setting:press buttonv repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the button is not lit.

X To call up the stored front-passengerseat and rear seat settings: press button

146 Memory function in the rear compartmentSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

v repeatedly until the indicator lamp inthe button lights up.

X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1 or 2 until the rear seat or thefront-passenger seat is in the stored posi-tion.

i Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon asyou release the storage position button.The adjustment of the multicontour seat isstill carried out.

Memory function in the rear compartment 147

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

148

Useful information ............................ 150Exterior lighting ................................ 150Interior lighting ................................. 155Replacing bulbs ................................. 157Windshield wipers ............................ 157

149

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlampsSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-metrical lights, the edge of the road is not litas widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Asymmetrical low beamHave the headlamps converted back to asym-metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible aftercrossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 152)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 312)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or other

150 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

causes of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 312).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or off

automatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the "daytime running lamps" functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking lamps and thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.

Exterior lighting 151

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.

The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it con-trols activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 153).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

152 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the low-beam headlampsare switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notes

With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you canautomatically switch between low-beam, par-tial high-beam and high-beam headlamps.Partial high-beam is a form of illuminationwhereby the high-beam is directed past otherroad users. Other road users are kept out ofthe high-beam. This prevents glare. Whenthere is a vehicle in front, for example, thehigh-beam headlamps illuminate the areas toits right and left, and the vehicle in front isilluminated by the low-beam headlamps.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.If the high-beam or partial high-beam arecausing too much reflection from trafficsigns, the lights are automatically dimmedand glare for the driver caused by the reflec-tions is thus avoided.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Exterior lighting 153

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec-ognize road users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus may not recognize road users who dohave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated orwill be activated regardless. There is a risk ofan accident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot takeinto account road, weather or traffic condi-tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is onlyan aid. You are responsible for adjusting thevehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visi-bility and traffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam AssistPLUS on/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up if it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 28 mph (45 km/h) and other roadusers have been detected:Partial high-beam is selected automati-cally. The K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 25 mph (40 km/h):The partial high-beam headlamps areswitched off automatically. If no other road

154 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

users are recognize, the high-beam head-lamps are switched on.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or the roads areadequately illuminated:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p To switch the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lightingon/off

? u To switch the rear interior lightingon/off

A p To switch the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

X To switch on on the corresponding sideof the vehicle: press button;.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamplight up.

X To switch off: press button;.Press once: the make-up lamp goes out.Press twice: reading lamp: goes out.

X To switch on on both sides of the vehi-cle: press button=.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamplight up.

X To switch off: press button=.Reading lamp: and the make-up lamp goout.

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color, brightness, zone and display lampfor the ambient lighting can be set using

Interior lighting 155

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

COMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions for COMAND).The interior lighting control can be operatedusing the front overhead control panel.

Automatic interior lighting control

: p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | Switches the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= c Switches the front interior lightingon/off

? u Switches the rear interior lightingon/off

A p Switches the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

X To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. This delayed switch-off can beadjusted using COMAND (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).

Manual interior lighting control

: p To switch the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | To switch the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= c To switch the front interior lightingon/off

? u To switch the rear interior lightingon/off

A p To switch the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

X To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

156 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-ted inadvertently. This could then damagethe windshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the power supply with the Start/Stop button or the SmartKey (Y page 189).

X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wipers to wipe more frequently.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: thewasher fluid is fed through the wiper bladesand when wiping with washer fluid î thewasher fluid is emitted directly from theblades.Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: ifyou push and hold the combination switchbeyond the point of resistance in the directionof arrowB, the manual wash program isactivated. If you briefly push and hold thecombination switch beyond the point ofresistance in the direction of arrowB, theautomatic wash program is activated.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This could

Windshield wipers 157

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

prevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiperarms vertically before folding them awayfrom the windshield. By doing so, you willavoid damage to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades (standardwindshield wipers)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-tion.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical tothe hood, turn the SmartKey to position0 inthe ignition lock (Y page 189).

X Remove the SmartKey.X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-shield until you feel them snap into place.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wipers to position °.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until thewindshieldwipers stop.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-shield until you feel them snap into place.

Removing the wiper blades

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

158 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Installing the wiper blades

X Position the new wiper blade: withrecessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

Replacing the wiper blades (MAGICVISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical posi-tionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-tion.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X As soon as the wiper arms are vertical tothe hood, turn the SmartKey to position0 inthe ignition lock (Y page 189).

X Remove the SmartKey.X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-shield until you feel them snap into place.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wipers to position °.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached the ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until thewindshieldwipers stop.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-shield until you feel them snap into place.

Removing a wiper blade

X To bring thewiper blade into position tobe removed: hold thewiper arm firmlywithone hand. With the other hand, turn thewiper blade in the direction of arrow:beyond the point of resistance.The wiper blade engages in the removalposition with an audible click.

X To remove a wiper blade: firmly pressrelease knob; and pull the wiper bladeupwards=.

Installing the wiper blades

Windshield wipers 159

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Push the newwiper blade in the direction ofarrow: onto the wiper arm until tab;engages.

X Push the wiper blade out of the removalposition in the direction of arrow= beyondthe point of resistance.The wiper blade disengages with an audibleclick and is freely movable again.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

160 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare obstructed

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

For a standard wipersystem only: the wind-shield washer fluidfrom the spray nozzlesno longer hits the cen-ter of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Windshield wipers 161

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

162

Useful information ............................ 164Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 164Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 169Setting the air vents ......................... 184

163

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand air humidity in the vehicle interior. The airfilter cleans the air, thus improving the inte-rior climate.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. Optimum climate control is only ach-ieved with the side windows and roof closed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 177).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 107).This will speed up the cooling process and

the desired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the blower may be acti-vated automatically 60 minutes after theSmartKey has been removed depending onvarious factors, e.g. the outside tempera-ture. The vehicle is then ventilated for30 minutes to dry the climate control sys-tem.

164 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Automatic climate control panel

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 171); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 174)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 177)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 175)B Calls up the COMAND climate control menuC Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 176)D Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 170)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 174)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 171)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 174)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 171)K Sets the airflow (Y page 174)L Switches climate control on/off (Y page 169)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 174)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)

Overview of climate control systems 165

Climatecontrol

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 171); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 174)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 177)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 175)B Calls up the COMAND climate control menuC Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 176)D Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 170)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 174)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 171)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 174)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 171)K Sets the airflow (Y page 174)L Switches climate control on/off (Y page 169)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 174)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)

166 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

PLUG-IN HYBRID (USA only)Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 171); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 174)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 177)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 175)B Calls up the COMAND climate control menu

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 176)D Activates/deactivates "immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 183)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 174)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 171)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 174)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 171)K Sets the airflow (Y page 174)L Switches climate control on/off (Y page 169)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 174)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)

Overview of climate control systems 167

Climatecontrol

PLUG-IN HYBRID (Canada only)Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic, left (Y page 171); Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)= Sets the airflow, left (Y page 174)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 177)A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 175)B Calls up the COMAND climate control menu

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 176)D Activates/deactivates "immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 183)E Sets the airflow, right (Y page 174)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)G Sets climate control to automatic, right (Y page 171)

Rear control panel (vehicles with rear-compartment climate control)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 173)I Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 174)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 171)K Sets the airflow (Y page 174)L Switches climate control on/off (Y page 169)

Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 177)M Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 174)N Sets the temperature, right (Y page 173)

168 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Notes on using automatic climatecontrol

Climate control systemBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use climatecontrol optimally.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp in theà rocker switch lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off. Theresidual heat function is switched off whenthe ignition is switched on.

If you are controlling the rear climate controlusing the front control panel, note the follow-ing:RIf you set rear-compartment climate con-trol using the front control panel, theYsymbol appears in the rear-compartmentcontrol panel display.RIf the rear-compartment climate control isset using the front control panel, it cannotbe set at the same time using the rear con-trol panel. If controlling the rear climatecontrol from the front control panel islocked, wait five seconds. You will then beable to control the rear climate controlusing the rear control panel.RAfter selecting the rear compartment set-tings, the front climate control can be con-trolled automatically again via COMANDafter five seconds.

Alternatively, you can select "Cancel rearcompartment" in the COMAND air-condi-tioning function bar.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 194).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybrieflySwitch on climate control primarily using theà rocker switch (Y page 171).

Switching the front climate control onand off using the control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To activate: press thet rocker switchup or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Activate climate control via the air-condi-tioning setting bar in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press thet rockerswitch up or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Deactivate climate control via the air-con-ditioning setting bar in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

Operating the climate control systems 169

Climatecontrol

Switching the rear-compartment cli-mate control on/off using the front con-trol panelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the frontcontrol panel (Y page 169).X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To activate: press thet rocker switchup or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panelor COMAND.

X Activate rear-compartment climate controlvia the air-conditioning setting bar.

X To deactivate: press thet rockerswitch up or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).

X Deactivate rear-compartment climate con-trol via the air-conditioning setting bar.

Switching rear-compartment climatecontrol on/off using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. All settings are displayed in full in therear-compartment display.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL upor down (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchLlights up. OFFOFF is displayed in the rear-com-partment display.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidificationX To activate: press theÁ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function via COMAND (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X To deactivate: press theÁ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

orX Deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidi-fication" function via COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

170 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp intheÁ buttonflashes three times orremains off. Coolingwith air dehumidifica-tion can also no longerbe switched on usingCOMAND (see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.

Controlling front climate control auto-matically using the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front controlunit.

orX Set the desired temperature usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X To activate: press rocker switchà upor down.The indicator lamp in theà rockerswitch lights up.

X To switch tomanual operation: press theK rocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

orX Set the air distribution using COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).The indicator lamp in theà rockerswitch goes out.

In automaticmode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lampon theà rocker switch goes out. The func-tion which has not been changed manually,

Operating the climate control systems 171

Climatecontrol

however, continues to be controlled automat-ically. When the manually set functionswitches back to automatic mode, the indi-cator lamp on theà rocker switch lightsup again.

Controlling rear climate control auto-matically using the front control panelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the frontcontrol panel (Y page 169).X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press thet rocker switch up or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panelor COMAND.

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front controlunit.

orX Set the desired temperature usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X To activate: press theà rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.

orX Activate automatic mode via the air-condi-tioning setting bar in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).The indicator lamp in theà rockerswitch lights up.i Select the temperature and automaticmode immediately thereafter. Otherwise,you will have to select "Rear adjustment"again from the air-conditioning setting barbefore activating automatic mode.

X To switch tomanual operation: press thet rocker switch up or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).

X Use the air-conditioning setting bar todeactivate automatic mode.

orX Set the air distribution using rocker switchI orM on the rear control panel(Y page 165).

orX Set the airflow using rocker switchK onthe rear control panel (Y page 165).The AUTOAUTO indicator on the rear display goesout.

If you adjust the rear airflow or air distributionmanually using COMAND when in automaticmode, the AUTOAUTO indicator on the rear displaygoes out. The function which has not beenchanged manually, however, continues to becontrolled automatically. When the manuallyset function switches back to automaticmode, the AUTOAUTO display reappears in the rear-compartment display.

Controlling rear climate control auto-matically using the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Set the desired temperature using rockerswitchesH andN (Y page 165).

X To activate: press rocker switchJ up ordown (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJlights up.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchJ upor down (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchJ goesout.

If you adjust the airflow or air distributionmanually when in automatic mode, the AUTOAUTOdisplay in the rear-compartment display goes

172 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

out. The functionwhich has not been changedmanually, however, continues to be control-led automatically. When the manually setfunction switches back to automatic mode,the AUTOAUTO display reappears in the rear-com-partment display.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsIn automatic mode you can select the follow-ing airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less of a draftX To set: set the climate mode usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Setting the temperature

General notes

You can set the temperature separately forthe following areas on vehicleswith rear-com-partment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger areaRrear compartment, left and right

You can set the temperature separately forthe following areas on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control:Rfront footwells, left and rightRdriver and front passenger area

Setting the temperature in the frontcompartment using the front controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To increase/reduce: press thewrocker switch up or down.

orX Set the temperature using COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rearcompartment using the front controlpanelObserve the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the frontcontrol panel (Y page 169).

Operating the climate control systems 173

Climatecontrol

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press thet rocker switch up or down.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panelor COMAND.

X To increase/reduce: press thewrocker switch on the front control panel upor down.

orX Set the temperature using COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the temperature in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To increase/reduce: press rockerswitchH orN up or down (Y page 165).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the footwell temperatureThe footwell temperature for the driver andfront passenger can be set separately usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

vents

S Directs air through the center, side andfootwell vents

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

W Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting the air distribution in the front/rear compartment using COMANDThe air distribution for the left and right sidesof the front and rear compartment can beadjusted using COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

Setting the air distribution in the rearcompartment using the rear controlpanelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press rocker switchI orM up or downrepeatedly (Y page 165) until the desiredair distribution symbol is shown in the dis-play.

Setting the airflow

General notesYou can select different airflow settings forthe driver's and front-passenger sides as wellas for the rear compartment (only vehicleswith rear compartment climate control).Observe the notes on controlling the rear-compartment climate control using the frontcontrol panel (Y page 169).

Setting the front-compartment airflowusing the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To increase/reduce: press theKrocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

174 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press the top or bottom section of thetrocker switch.The COMAND climate control menu opens.

X Select "Rear adjustment" in the air-condi-tioning setting bar (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions).You can control the rear-compartment cli-mate control using the front control panelor COMAND.

X To increase/reduce: press theKrocker switch on the front control panel upor down.

orX Set the airflow using COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To increase/reduce: press rocker switchK up or down (Y page 165).

Switching the synchronization func-tion on/offClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronization function. The settings fortemperature, air distribution and airflow onthe driver's side are adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment(vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning).X To activate/deactivate: switch the syn-chronization function on or off using

COMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).Vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning: the SYNCSYNC display appears on therear-compartment display.

The synchronization function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger sideare changedRvehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning: the settings for the rear compart-ment are changed

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield orfront side windows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To activate: press the¬ rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rockerswitch lights up.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offRwindshield heating on

X To deactivate: press the¬ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp in the¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previously selectedsettings are restored. Air-recirculationmode remains deactivated.

orX Press theà rocker switch up or down.

Operating the climate control systems 175

Climatecontrol

orX Use thet rocker switch to call up theCOMAND climate control menu.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function with theÁ rockerswitch.

orX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function via COMAND (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe "Windshield defrosting" function usingthe¬ rocker switch. The windshieldheating is switched on.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, theydo not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

176 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flowof fresh air manually if unpleasant odors areentering the vehicle from outside. The airalready inside the vehicle will then be recir-culated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To activate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in theg rockerswitch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-vated at high levels of pollution or at high out-side temperatures. The indicator lamp in theg rocker switch is not lit when automaticair-recirculation mode is activated. Outsideair is added after about 30 minutes.X To deactivate: press theg rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp in theg rockerswitch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-cally:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesVehicles with rear-compartment climatecontrol: once the engine is switched off, it ispossible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating or ventilatingthe rear and front compartment of the vehiclefor approximately 15minutes. If the "Residualheat" function is set for only the front or onlythe rear compartment, it is possible to con-tinue heating or ventilating for approximately30 minutes.Vehicles without rear-compartment cli-mate control: once the engine is switchedoff, it is possible to make use of the residualheat of the engine to continue heating or ven-tilating the front compartment of the vehiclefor approximately 30 minutes.The heating or ventilation time depends onthe temperature that has been set.

Operating the climate control systems 177

Climatecontrol

Front control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it (Y page 189).

X To activate: press theÁ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp in theÁ rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.X To deactivate: press theÁ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp in theÁ rockerswitch goes out.

Rear control panelX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it (Y page 189).REST appears in the rear compartment dis-play.

X To activate: press rocker switchL up ordown (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchLlights up.

X To deactivate: press rocker switchL upor down (Y page 165).The indicator lamp in rocker switchL goesout. REST goes out on the rear compart-ment display.i If you do not activate the residual heatfunction, REST goes out automatically afterfive minutes on the rear compartment dis-play.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30minutes if the resid-ual heat function is activated in the front orrear compartmentRafter approximately 15minutes if the resid-ual heat function is activated in the frontand rear compartments

Rwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNINGIf children open the perfume vial, they coulddrink the perfume or it could come into con-tactwith their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Donot leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull perfume vials must notbe disposed of with house-hold rubbish. They must becollected separately andrecycled to protect the envi-ronment.

Dispose of full perfume vialsin an environmentallyresponsible manner andtake them to a special wastecollection point.

: Perfume lid; Perfume vialThe perfume atomizer helps to improve driv-ing comfort.

178 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Using COMAND, you can:Rswitch the perfume atomizer on and offRregulate the perfume intensitySee the separate operating instructions.

The following conditions can affect your per-ception of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the automatic climatecontrolRinterior temperatureRtime of year/dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g.fatigue or hunger

The perfume atomizer can only be operatedwhen the automatic climate control isswitched on and is only active when the glovebox is closed.The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-filled perfume vial. You can also choose froma variety of filled perfume vials and an emptyvial which you can fill yourself.If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to thevial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe themanufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packag-ing.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when itis empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.X To insert the perfumevial: open the glovebox (Y page 373).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as faras it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lidof the empty perfume vial to refill it your-self.

X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml ofthe desired liquid perfume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outsidethe vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfumecould drip into the interior and contaminateit.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, youmight not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-izer.

Operating the climate control systems 179

Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The vehicle interior isnot perfumed althoughthe perfume atomizer isactivated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as itwill go.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial has not been adequately filled.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of thesame perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty.X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

IonizationYou can use the "Ionization" function to purifythe air in the vehicle interior and attain animproved interior climate.The ionization of the interior air is odorlessand cannot be perceived directly in the vehi-cle interior.You can switch ionization on and off usingCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).Ionization can only be switched on if the frontautomatic climate control is activated. Theside air vent on the driver's side must beopen.

Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key

General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"function is only available on PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles.Before getting in, the driver's seat area or thewhole interior can be briefly warmed or ven-tilated in advance with the air from the airvents being pre-cooled.

The high-voltage battery must be sufficientlycharged before "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" can be activated.When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the followingfunctions are activated:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilationWhen the vehicle is pre-warmed, the followingfunctions are activated:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defrosterIf you have activated the following functionsusing COMAND, they are activated togetherwith the "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key" function:RArmrest heatingRperfume atomizerRIonization

180 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Activating the perfume atomizer/ionization(see separate COMAND operating instruc-tions).

Activating/deactivating "Pre-entry cli-mate control via SmartKey"Before "Pre-entry climate control via Smart-Key" can be switched on, you must activatethe function via COMAND (see separate oper-ating instructions).The function may also be activated via the"Vehicle Homepage" (Y page 220).X To activate pre-entry climate controlvia SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The climate control functions are activatedfor up to 5 minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling.

To deactivate "Pre-entry climate controlvia SmartKey": "Pre-entry climate controlvia SmartKey" switches off automaticallywhen the engine is started.The following functions remain active afterthe engine is started:Rseat heating (heating)Rseat ventilation (ventilation)Rarmrest heatingRperfume atomizerRIonizationAn activated "Pre-entry climate control viaSmartKey" function can be deactivated usingthe rocker switch (Y page 183).

Operating the climate control systems 181

Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey"

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

"Pre-entry climate con-trol via SmartKey" can-not be switched on orhas switched itself off.

The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is under thespecified minimum condition of charge.X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill.The engine powers the electric motor. The electric motor oper-ates as a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged.

Further information on charging the high-voltage battery via:Ra mains socket (Y page 212)Ra charging station (Y page 216)Ra wallbox (Y page 215)

"Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" has been started morethan twice with the engine switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Try again to switch on "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey".

Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

General notesThe "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function is only available on PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles.You can use the "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" function to cool or heat thevehicle interior if the engine is not running.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function can be activated regardless ofwhether or not the vehicle is connected to anelectric power supply. The condition ofcharge of the high-voltage battery must behigher than the specified minimum conditionof charge, however.

When the vehicle is connected to an electricpower supply, priority is given to charging thehigh-voltage battery to the specified mini-mum charge. "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" is only activated subse-quently.The running time of the "Pre-entry climatecontrol at departure time" function may bereduced if:Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electricpower supply andRthe high-voltage battery is not fully chargedWith active "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" the condition of charge of thehigh-voltage battery can be reduced, even ifthe charge cable connector is connected.When the vehicle is cooled, the followingfunctions are activated:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat ventilation

182 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

When the vehicle is heated, the followingfunctions are activated:RClimate control systemRBlowerRSeat heatingRSteering wheel heatingRArmrest heatingRExterior mirror heatingRRear window defroster

i In contrast to the rest of the climate con-trol functions, the seat heating/ventilation,steeringwheel heating and armrest heatingonly switch on if required.

If you have switched on the perfume atomizeror the ionization using COMAND, thesewill beactivated together with the "Pre-entry climatecontrol at departure time".Activating the perfume atomizer/ionization(see separate COMAND operating instruc-tions).

Setting the departure timeYou can set the departure time using theinstrument cluster or via the "Vehicle Home-page" (Y page 220). The activation of the"Pre-entry climate control at departure time"function can be linked to this departure time.Your vehicle will then be cooled or heateduntil the desired temperature is reached intime for the set departure time. "Pre-entryclimate control at departure time" will be acti-vated a maximum of 55 minutes beforedeparture. If the departure is delayed, thevehicle will be heated or cooled for a furtherfive minutes.X To set the departure time: set the depar-ture time via the instrument cluster. To setthe departure time via the "Vehicle Home-page" (Y page 220).

X To activate/deactivate "Pre-entry cli-mate control at departure time": acti-vate/deactivate "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" via COMAND (see sep-arate operating instructions). To activate/

deactivate the "Pre-entry climate control atdeparture time" function via the VehicleHomepage (Y page 220).

When activating the "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" function: you canselect whether only the driver's area or thewhole vehicle interior should be heated orcooled.The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function switches off automaticallywhen the vehicle is started. The followingfunctions remain active:RSeat heatingRSeat ventilationRArmrest heatingRSteering wheel heatingRPerfume atomizerRIonizationSwitching off "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time": the activated "Pre-entryclimate control at departure time" can beswitched off using the rocker switch(Y page 183).

Activating/deactivating "Immediatepre-entry climate control" using therocker switch

You can activate "Immediate pre-entry cli-mate control" even if the vehicle interior isalready at the desired temperature. Thismeans that the vehicle interior continues tobe cooled or heated, e.g. if the journey isinterrupted for up to 50minutes, and the inte-rior temperature is kept constant.

Operating the climate control systems 183

Climatecontrol

Z

The colors of the indicator lamps in the rockerswitch have the following meanings:Rblue: cooling activatedRred: heating activatedRyellow: departure time preselectedX Toactivate/deactivate "Immediate pre-entry climate control" : press rockerswitch: up or down.The blue or red indicator lamp above therocker switch lights up or goes out.

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Fixed center air vent; Center air vent, right= Center vent control, right? Center vent control, leftA Center air vent, leftX To open/close: press control= or?.The control pops out.

X Turn control= or? counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear airvent; orA by themiddle fin andmove upor down or to the left or right.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Thumbwheel for left side air vent

184 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

X To open/close: press control=.The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by the middle fin and move it up ordown or to the left or right.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-cle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "coolingwith air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, temper-ature-sensitive items stored in the glovebox could be damaged.

When the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel: to theleft or right.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rear com-partment

: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent control, right? Rear control panelA Rear-compartment air vent control, leftVehicles with rear-compartment climate con-trolX To open/close: press control= orA.The control pops out.

X Turn control= orA counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold the rearair vent: or; by themiddle fin andmoveup or down or to the left or right.

Setting the air vents 185

Climatecontrol

Z

Vehicles without rear-compartment climatecontrol (only Sedans and vehicles with anextended wheelbase):X To open/close: press control=.The control pops out.

X Turn control= counter-clockwise orclockwise.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear airvent: or; by themiddle fin andmove upor down or to the left or right.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

X Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel; to theleft or right.

X To adjust the air direction: hold B-pillarair vent: by the middle fin handle andmove up or down or to the left or right.

186 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Useful information ............................ 188Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 188Driving ............................................... 188Automatic transmission ................... 197Refueling ............................................ 205Charging the high-voltage battery(plug-in hybrid vehicles) ................... 209Parking ............................................... 220Driving tips ........................................ 224Driving systems ................................ 229PLUG-IN HYBRID operation .............. 276

187

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RWhen shifting gears manually, upshift ingood time, before the tachometer needlereachesÔ of the way to the red area of thetachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).RAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ide-ally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program E.

Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the respective speed limits.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

188 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoidhigh engine speeds and driving at full throt-tle until the engine has reached its operat-ing temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to pro-tect the engine. To protect the engine and

maintain smooth engine operation, avoiddriving at full throttle when the engine iscold.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 46).

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engineThe SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notesAll vehicles are equipped with a removableStart/Stop button.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button intothe ignition lock, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the different

Driving 189

Drivingandparking

Z

key positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91).

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.Do not keep the SmartKey in the tempera-ture-controlled cup holder (Y page 380). Oth-erwise, the SmartKey will not be detected,e.g. when starting the engine with the Start/Stop button.If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryouwill not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-ton on the front door (Y page 97), you cancontinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.

The engine can be turned off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for approximately threeseconds. This function operates independ-ently of the ECO start/stop automatic engineswitch-off function.

SmartKey positions with the Start/Stopbutton

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 357).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

190 DrivingDrivingandparking

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off when:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position

= Start/Stop button USA? Start/Stop button Canada

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operationwhen the transmission is in position P.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when you leavethe vehicle. You should, however, always takethe SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

Driving 191

Drivingandparking

Z

General notesDuring a cold start, the engine runs at higherspeeds to enable the catalytic converter toreach its operating temperature. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 197).The transmission position display in themultifunction display showsP (Y page 199).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-tion P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyTo start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of the Start/Stop button, pull theStart/Stop button out of the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion (Y page 189) lock and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKeymust be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey isin the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey withyou when leaving the vehicle, even if you onlyleave it for a short time. Pay attention to theimportant safety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 189).The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-ing away.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 98).It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is theparking lock released. If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can stillbe moved but the parking lock remainsengaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of theelectric parking brake (Y page 222).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

192 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function (all vehiclesexcept plug-in hybrid)

IntroductionThis section describes the ECO start/stopfunction for all vehicles except PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles. Information on the ECOstart/stop function in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles (Y page 288).The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, theè ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc-tion display.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles).

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.

Driving 193

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.All vehicles (apart from AMG vehicles):automatic engine switch-off can take place amaximum of four times consecutively (initialstop then repeated three times).AMG vehicles: times which the engine canbe automatically switched off.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou switch to drive program S or M.Rin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of positionP.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.Shifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine willthen not be switched off automatically whenthe vehicle stops.If drive programS orM has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactiva-ted.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the driveprogram automatically switches to E.

AMG vehicles

194 DrivingDrivingandparking

X To switch off: in drive program C, pressECO button:.

orX Switch to drive program S or M(Y page 200).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If drive program S or M is active, the auto-matic transmission switches to drive pro-gram C.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine willthen not be switched off automatically whenthe vehicle stops.If drive programS orM has been selected, theECO start/stop function is always deactiva-ted.If you switch on the ECO start/stop functionwhile drive program S is selected, the driveprogram automatically switches to C.

Driving 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKeyin the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 191). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 432).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture gage shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 408). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

196 DrivingDrivingandparking

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 46).

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns toits original position. The current transmissionposition P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-sion position display (Y page 199) in the mul-tifunction display.

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD to R, fromR toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and remove the SmartKey.Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door.Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicleis stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission 197

Drivingandparking

Z

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 193).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.

If the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.RRelease the brake pedal.RPull the Start/Stop button out of the igni-tion.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.RDepress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

198 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission position display

General notes

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. For this purpose, we recommendselecting transmission positionD and auto-matic drive program E (drive program C inAMG vehicles, drive program E+ in PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles) or S.

The current transmission position is shown inthe multifunction display.The arrows in the transmission position dis-play show how and into which transmissionpositions you can change using the DIRECTSELECT lever.

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive program

AMG vehicles

: Transmission position; Drive program

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 220) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake in addi-tion to the parking lock in order tosecure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P. Have thevehicle electronics checked imme-diately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission 199

Drivingandparking

Z

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission to positionNif the vehicle is in danger of skid-ding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 200)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 200)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positionsD andRcan help to free a vehicle that has becomestuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's enginemanagement restricts switching betweentransmission positions D and R to speeds upto a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shiftback and forth between transmission posi-tionsD and R, move the DIRECT SELECT leverup and down past the point of resistance.

Program selector buttonThis section describes the program selectorbutton for all vehicles except PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles. Information on automaticdrive programs for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles(Y page 285).

X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles andPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles): press pro-

200 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

gram selector button: to change thedrive program.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: press program selectorbutton: repeatedly until the letter of thedesired drive program appears in the mul-tifunction display.

The program selector button influences:Rthe drive program (Y page 202)Rthe engine managementIn AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.When the engine is started, the automatictransmission always switches to automaticdrive program E (drive program C in AMGvehicles).All vehicles (except AMG vehicles andPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

You can also activate manual drive programM using the steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 202). In manual drive program M,you can briefly change gear yourself by usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.

AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Permanent drive program M is only availablefor AMG vehicles.Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 203).You can also activate manual drive programM using the steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 202). In manual drive program M,you can briefly change gear yourself by usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters.For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 202).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

You can activate manual drive program M inthe E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automaticdrive programs using steering wheel paddleshifters: and; (Y page 202). In manualdrive programM, you can briefly change gearyourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters.AMG vehicles: you can also activate manualdrive program M with the program selectorbutton (Y page 203). In manual drive pro-gram M, you can permanently change gearyourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters.

Automatic transmission 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program EDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.

Automatic drive program SDrive program S is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rsporty engine settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplater.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters. The transmissionmust be in posi-tion D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E (C in AMG vehicles) and S automaticdrive programs.AMG vehicles: as well as temporary driveprogramM, you can also activate permanent

drive program M. Further information aboutpermanent drive program M (Y page 203).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 201).Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: M andthe selected gear appear in the multifunc-tion display.

Further information on activating manualdrive programM on PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles(Y page 286).

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-mission immediately shifts into the next geardown or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 201).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.AMGvehicles: the automatic transmissionwill not shift up to the next gear when theengine speed is very low.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 201).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine dam-age by not shifting down.

202 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deacti-vated, the automatic transmission shifts intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected.You can also deactivate manual drive pro-gram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 201).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 200).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches tothe previously activated drive program E(drive program C on AMG vehicles) or S.

Manual drive program (AMG vehicles)

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D.Manual drive program M is different fromdrive program S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.As well as this permanent drive program M,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 202).

Switching on the manual drive programIn manual drive program M, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersif the transmission is in position D. You cansee the currently selected drive program andwhich gear is engaged in the multifunctiondisplay.X Press the program selector button(Y page 200) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.

Upshifting

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area of

Automatic transmission 203

Drivingandparking

Z

the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-tion display changes to red and the UPUP dis-play message is shown, shift up a gearusing the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear if this is permissible.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 201).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear if this is permissible.

Maximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects theoptimum gear according to the speed.

If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission automati-cally shifts down.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 200) repeatedly until C or Sappears in the multifunction display.

204 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation (Y page 290).

Transfer case! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! To prevent ESP® from intervening, theignition must be switched off (SmartKey orthe Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicleswith 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

Refueling 205

Drivingandparking

Z

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection

system could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 490).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 205).PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: pressure in thefuel tank must be released before refueling.Except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: If youunlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, thefuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Preparing to refuelX Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

206 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Opening the fuel filler flap (exceptPLUG-IN hybrid vehicles)

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be usedX Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-INHYBRID vehicles)

X Pull switch:.Indicator lamp; flashes and the PleasePleaseWait Depressurizing TankWait Depressurizing Tank messageappears in the multifunction display.If the fuel filler cap is open, indicatorlamp; lights up.The Tank is Depressurized ReadyTank is Depressurized Readyfor Refuelingfor Refueling message appears in themultifunction display.Please be sure to observe the informationon refueling on the fuel filler flap.

There is a malfunction if:Rindicator lamp; first flashes and thengoes outRthe yellow engine diagnosticswarning lamplights up

i From a speed of 2 km/h, the fuel filler capcan no longer be opened.

i The opening process for the fuel filler capmay take up to 15 minutes.

Refueling 207

Drivingandparking

Z

: To insert the fuel filler cap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type to be usedX Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of the fuel filler flap.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with thefuel filler flap open, the TankklappeTankklappe offenoffen(Fuel filler flap open)(Fuel filler flap open) message isshown in the multifunction display.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 363).

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in the multi-function display (Y page 339).

In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 363).For further information onwarning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see(Y page 363).

208 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same asthe SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 91).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 93).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the high-voltage battery(plug-in hybrid vehicles)

Important safety notes

G DANGERThe vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify the

vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 209

Drivingandparking

Z

G DANGERIf you use incorrectly installed mains socketsor adapters, extension cables or similar toconnect the charging cable to amains socket,this could lead to fires or an electric shock.There is a risk of fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to mainssockets that:- are installed correctly and- have been approved by an electrical spe-cialist.

RFor safety reasons, only use the chargingcables supplied with the vehicle, or charg-ing cables which have been approved foruse with this vehicle.RNever use a damaged charging cable.RDo not use:

- Extension cables- Cable drums- Multiple socketsRDo not use a socket adapter to connect thecharging cable to the mains socket. Theonly exception is if the adapter has beentested and approved by the manufacturerfor charging the high-voltage battery in anelectric vehicle.RAlways observe the safety notes in thesocket adapter's operating instructions.

G DANGERConnecting the charging cable to the wallboxvia an incorrectly installed wallbox or adapter,extension cable or similar could cause a fire oran electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:ROnly connect the charging cable to a wall-box that:- is installed correctly and- has been approved by an electrical spe-cialist.

RFor safety reasons, only use chargingcables that have been tested and approvedby the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.RNever use damaged charging cables.RDo not extend the charging cable.RDo not use an adapter.RAlways observe the safety notes in the wall-box's operating instructions.

The vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage.RDo not tamper with the high-voltage com-ponents or the orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system.RDo not touch high-voltage components orthe orange cables of the high-voltage elec-trical system when a vehicle has beeninvolved in a crash.RNever touch damaged components or thedamaged orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system.RDo not remove the covers of the high-volt-age electrical system components that aremarked with a warning sticker.

General notes

Method of operationThe vehicle is equipped with a high-voltagebattery for driving. The high-voltage batterystores the energy needed to operate the elec-tric motor and releases it again.The electric motor uses energy that has beenstored in the high-voltage battery when pull-ing away, accelerating and during the jour-ney.

210 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles)Drivingandparking

In overrun mode, kinetic energy is convertedby means of energy recuperation into electri-cal energy and stored in the high-voltage bat-tery.The high-voltage battery can be charged asfollows:Rthrough energy recuperation while thevehicle is in motionRduring the journey using the CHARGEmodeRwith the relevant charging cable at an elec-trical outlet while the vehicle is stationaryRwith the relevant charging cable at a wall-box while the vehicle is stationaryRwith the relevant charging cable at a charg-ing station while the vehicle is stationary

The high-voltage battery can be charged in anominal voltage range from 100 V to 240 V.

High and low outside temperaturesLow outside temperaturesAt very low outside temperatures the maxi-mumpower output of the high-voltage batterymay be reduced. The high-voltage battery isthen no longer able to provide the normalelectrical power output.High outside temperaturesTo prevent damage to the high-voltage bat-tery due to very high outside temperatures,the maximum power output of the high-volt-age battery is reduced by the vehicle.

Energy consumption and electricalrangeThe maximum electrical range is generallyreduced by:Rhigh and low outside temperaturesRthe use of air conditioning or heatingRswitching on consumers

The battery's physical characteristics aresuch that leaving the vehicle parked for longperiods at low outdoor temperatures withoutcharging it can lead to:Ra reduction in battery performanceRlonger charge times

Notes on battery careAvoid storing or transporting the vehicle intemperatures that are too high or too low overa long period (e.g. container transport).If you park the vehicle and leave it stationaryfor longer periods, connect it to a power sup-ply.

Conditions of usePlease note the information on exceptionsand limitations in warranty documentationand in the Maintenance Booklet.

Handling the charging cable and charg-ing cable controlsDo not leave the charging cable controls(Y page 213) hanging loose from an electricaloutlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poorcontact with the electrical outlet and mal-functions when charging the vehicle.To ensure that the cable on the controls of thecharging cable is not subjected to incorrectloads, observe the following:RNever lift the controls up at the chargingcable connector or the power supply plug.RDo not carry the controls by the connector.

Heat generated by the charging cableand connectorPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 209).During the charging process, the chargingcable and connector may heat up.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 211

Drivingandparking

Z

The charging cable and connector will onlyheat up within the permissible limiting values,provided that:Rthe power supply and the charging cableare not damagedRthe instructions for handling the chargingcable and controls on the charging cableare observed

If the charging cable or plug get too hot, havethe mains power supply checked.

Protection device against overvoltage

! Overvoltage in the mains supply maydamage the vehicle. For this reason, thevehicle is equippedwith a protection deviceagainst overvoltage in the mains supply.This device may be triggered during severethunderstorms, for example, and may leadto the building's fuse being tripped and aninterruption in the power supply. Thesefunctions protect the vehicle. After thebuilding fuse is switched on again, thecharging process resumes automatically.Following an interruption in the power sup-ply or tripping of the building's fuse, it maytake up to 10 minutes for charging toresume automatically.

Switch on the building's fuse again after it hasbeen triggered. Otherwise, the charging proc-ess cannot be continued.

General information about the chargingprocedurePay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 209).If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out-side, the charge socket flap also unlocks/locks.The charge socket flap is behind the bumperon the right-hand side below the rear lampcluster.

Charging the high-voltage battery viathe electrical outlet

Charging cable for mains sockets

Important safety notes! Only use the charging cable to charge thehigh-voltage battery. Do not use the charg-ing cable for other purposes. It may other-wise be damaged.

A charging cable for connection to the mainssocket is included with the vehicle. Only usethe charging cable included with the vehicleor charging cables that have been approvedfor the vehicle.

i If you use the supplied 12 A chargingcable to charge a high-voltage battery:Rthe charge time increases considerablyRelectrical consumption increases consid-erably

Where possible, charge the high-voltagebattery at a charging station (Y page 216).Only then can certified electrical energyconsumption levels be reached.

i The charging process can vary dependingon the power supply. Therefore, alwaysobserve the local information.

i For short charge times (charging with16A), connect the fast-charging cable tothe wallbox/charging station. You can alsouse the optionally available charging cablewith the CE plug.

Information about charging from a wallboxcan be found at (Y page 215).Information about charging at a charging sta-tion can be found at (Y page 216).

Stowing the charging cableThe charging cable can be stowed in the bagsupplied in the trunk of the vehicle and held inplace with the Velcro fastener.

212 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles)Drivingandparking

Controls on the charging cable

: Alternating current status indicator; Control/protection system indicator= Charge current indicator? Charge current setting buttonWhen displays: and; on the chargingcable light up, this means the following:

Display::

Lights upgreen

The external power supplyconnection is working prop-erly. The high-voltage bat-tery can be charged.

Flashes red A malfunction has beendetected in the externalpower supply. The high-volt-age battery is recharged assoon as the electricity signalregisters normal values.

Lights up red There is a malfunction. Thecharging cable must beremoved from the electricaloutlet and then re-inserted.

Display;;

Lights upgreen

There are no malfunctions.The high-voltage batterycan be charged.

Lights up red An impermissible current isbeing supplied to the con-trol unit. The high-voltagebattery cannot be charged.

i For information on problems relating tothe charging process, see (Y page 218).

Setting the maximum charge currentG WARNINGIf the charge current draw via a mains socketis too high during the charging process, theexternal electrical system may overheat.There is a risk of fire.Before beginning the charging process, checkthe maximum permissible charge currentlocally. Consult a qualified expert to do sowhere necessary.If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings.

! An excessive charge current can blow afuse or lead to overheating of the externalpower supply. Check whether the externalpower supply is compatible with the setcharge current. If necessary, lower the setcharge current or use another powersocket.

You can set a limit for the values of the chargecurrent used in charging the high-voltage bat-tery. This acts as a means of preventing thepower supply from overloading. You can setthis limit by using the controls on the chargingcable or in the on-board computer's menu.Only set the maximum charge current in theon-board computer menu if there are nocharge current settings on the chargingcable.The default standard value in the vehicle cor-responds to the maximum charge currentvalue.The default standard value on the chargingcable is the minimum charge current setting.This corresponds to the minimum availablecharge current from the power supply. Thevalue on the charging cable can be increasedand is described in the following section.

i The value of the maximum setting and theadjustment values may vary depending onthe country.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 213

Drivingandparking

Z

Before charging the high-voltage battery,check the maximum permissible charge cur-rent for the relevant power socket.X To adjust the setting: press button?repeatedly until the desired setting is selec-ted in display=.RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum settingRAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting

If, after the charging process, the chargingcable is:Rleft connected to the power socket, thecurrently selected values will be used forthe next charging process.Rremoved from the power socket, the valueswill be reset to the minimum setting for thenext charging process. You may then needto reset the values of the maximum chargecurrent.

i If the vehicle requires more time thanusual when charging, check the maximumcharge current settings using the controlson the charging cable or in the on-boardcomputer's menu.

Indicator lamp on the vehicle socketWhen the indicator lamp on the vehiclesocket lights up, this means the following:

IndicatorlampÝÝ

Flashesslowly inorange

The connection betweenthe vehicle and the currentsource is being establishedbefore charging begins.

Flashesslowly ingreen

The high-voltage battery isbeing charged.

Flashes rap-idly in red

A malfunction has occurredwhile charging.

IndicatorlampÝÝ

Lights uporange

A charging break for thehigh-voltage battery is tak-ing place.

Lights upgreen

The high-voltage battery isfully charged.

i If the indicator lamp is off, lock or unlockthe vehicle with the SmartKey. The indica-tor lamp will then display the current statusof the charging process.

i You can view the condition of charge ofthe high-voltage battery in the multifunc-tion display (see "Charging the high-voltagebattery when stationary" in the "Energyflow display" section (Y page 281)).

Connecting the charging cable

: To open the charge socket flap; Fastener= Vehicle charge socket flap

214 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles)Drivingandparking

? Vehicle socketA Indicator lampÝ

X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in the direc-tion of arrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Slide fastener; to the right.Vehicle socket flap= is open.

X Insert the power supply plug into the elec-trical outlet to the stop.

X Insert the charging cable connector intovehicle socket? to the stop.The high-voltage battery is being charged.Ý indicator lampA on vehiclesocket? flashes slowly green.

i The vehicle must not be moved duringcharging or when the charging cable is con-nected.

i Depending on the temperature, the fanand battery cooling system may audiblyswitch on during the charging process.

Removing the charging cableWhen the charge level display reaches 100%in the multifunction display, the battery isfully charged (Y page 281).

i After the charging cable has been discon-nected, the indicator lamp in the vehiclesocket remains lit for some time beforeswitching off.

When the battery is fully charged:X Unlock the vehicle.Ý indicator lampA on vehiclesocket? lights up green.

X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable from the vehicle socket.

X Close vehicle socket flap=.X Close charge socket flap:.X Remove the charging cable from the elec-trical outlet.

X Stow the charging cable safely in the vehi-cle (Y page 212).

Charging the high-voltage batteryfrom the wallbox

General notesIt is recommended that you charge your vehi-cle using a wallbox or at a charging station.Use the optional quick charging cable whencharging at a wallbox. The charging cable isstored in a bag in the trunk.Only use charging cables that have been tes-ted and approved by the manufacturer forcharging the high-voltage battery in an elec-tric vehicle.Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 209).

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Connecting the charging cable

: To open the charge socket flap; Fastener= Vehicle charge socket flap? Vehicle socketA Indicator lampÝX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.X Press the charge socket flap in the direc-tion of arrow:.The charge socket flap swings up.

X Slide fastener; to the right.Vehicle socket flap= is open.

X Insert the charging cable connector intovehicle socket? to the stop.The high-voltage battery is being charged.Ý indicator lampA on vehiclesocket? flashes slowly green.

i The vehicle must not be moved duringcharging or when the charging cable is con-nected.

i Depending on the temperature, the fanand battery cooling system may audiblyswitch on during the charging process.

Removing the charging cableWhen the charge level display reaches 100%in the multifunction display, the battery isfully charged (Y page 281).

i After the charging cable has been discon-nected, the indicator lamp in the vehiclesocket remains lit for some time beforeswitching off.

When the battery is fully charged:X Unlock the vehicle.Ý indicator lampA on vehiclesocket? lights up green.

X Press and hold buttonB on the chargingcable connector and remove the chargingcable from the vehicle socket.

X Close vehicle socket flap=.X Close charge socket flap:.

Charging the high-voltage battery atthe charging stationThe connection for the vehicle at a chargingstation is identical to the connection on awallbox. Read the "Charging a high-voltagebattery at a wallbox" section (Y page 215).Before beginning the charging process at acharging station without communicationcapabilities, you must first activate the sta-tion. You can do this by using an RFID card or

216 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles)Drivingandparking

via telephone activation. Observe the on-siteoperator instructions for the charging station.

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The charge socket flapcannot be opened.

The charge socket flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 91).

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Unlock the vehicle manually using the SmartKey (Y page 93).

The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Lock and unlock the vehicle.

If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage bat-tery is not beingcharged.

Amalfunction has occurred during the initialization of the chargingprocess.X Ensure that the charging cable is connected to the electricaloutlet.

X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehiclesocket and plug it back into the vehicle socket.

X If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The high-voltage bat-tery is not charged dur-ing the charging proc-ess when connected toa power socket.

The electrical outlet is faulty.X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioningproperly.

orX Use a different electrical outlet.

The charging cable con-nector cannot beremoved from the vehi-cle socket.

The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked.X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. Thesnap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked.

X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is blocked.X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector.X Try to remove the blockage.

218 Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles)Drivingandparking

Online access to the vehicle

General information

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

i Operation of integrated informationsystems and communications equip-ment in the vehicle: youmust observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.

From the "My Mercedes Electric - VehicleHomepage", you can call up remote query andremote configuration functions for your vehi-cle. This is possible from an Internet-enabledcomputer, as well as many modern smart-phones.You can access the "Vehicle Homepage" viayour web browser.Please call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotline num-ber1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)to obtain the relevant Internet address.In order to use the "Vehicle Homepage", youmust agree to the local terms of use.The contractual periods of mbrace apply tothe "Vehicle Homepage". To use the "VehicleHomepage", you require an activated accessto the mbrace emergency call system and aseparate activation/registration for the"Vehicle Homepage".More information about how to access the"Vehicle Homepage" and the terms of use areavailable from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

The "Vehicle Homepage" is available in thefollowing languages:RGermanREnglishRFrenchRItalianRSpanishRPortugueseRDutchRChinese

Notes on data protectionBear in mind that the "Vehicle Homepage"offers access to your data.Therefore, look after the vehicle verificationcode (VVC) provided and your user detailscarefully.The vehicle verification code (VVC) is requiredwhen you register for the first time on the"Vehicle Homepage". This code is used to linkthe vehicle and the user access on the "Vehi-cle Homepage" and enables correct use. Ifyou have any questions, please contact theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

i Prevent unauthorized persons fromaccessing this data.Every person who has access to the infor-mation stated can use the functions on the"Vehicle Homepage".

i Information when selling a vehicle orbuying a used vehicle:RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged todelete the vehicle from your personalarea on the "Vehicle Homepage". Addi-tionally, you must destroy documentscontaining the vehicle verification code(VVC).RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it ispossible that the previous owner still hasaccess to the "Vehicle Homepage". If indoubt, have a new vehicle verification

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid vehicles) 219

Drivingandparking

Z

code (VVC) issued by theMercedes-BenzCenter after purchase. With this newcode you can set up the access to yourvehicle. This is described in the "Settingup a personal area" section on the "Vehi-cle Homepage". There, you may alsodeactivate the existing access of the pre-vious owner.

Calling up functions in the "MyMercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage"The "VehicleHomepage" allows you access tovehicle information and your vehicle's func-tions using remote query and remote config-uration.The following functions can be accessed viathe "Vehicle Homepage":Rrequest the current condition of charge ofthe high-voltage batteryRprogram the departure time (Y page 310)Rset/activate the "Pre-entry climate controlat departure time" function (REMOTE CLI-MATE CONTROL), (see the separateCOMAND operating instructions)

Information on additional functions and oper-ating instructions can be found on the "Vehi-cle Homepage".

Connecting the vehicle to the Internet

i This function is not available in all coun-tries and requires activated access to thembrace emergency call system.

i This function is only available if the vehi-cle is equipped with a telephone module.

You can use the "Vehicle Homepage" if thevehicle has a connection to the Internet viathe telephonemodule. The telephonemoduleuses CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access)and transmits the necessary data by radio.The vehicle automatically recognizes whethera connection to the Internet via the telephonemodule is possible or not. No presets arenecessary.

i Restrictions in reception are possible ifthe vehicle is in an underground car park,for example. Restrictions may also occur inareas with poor mobile network coverage.

To enable the transfer of data via the tele-phone module, you do not need a SIM card.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.

220 ParkingDrivingandparking

Rthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

If the engine cannot be switched off as descri-bed here, see "Emergency engine cutoff"(Y page 440).

Using the SmartKeyX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.If you then open the driver's door or thefront-passenger door or remove the Smart-Key from the ignition, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P automatically.If you shift the automatic transmission toNbefore switching off the engine, the auto-matic transmission remains inN even if the

driver's door or the front-passenger door isopened.

Using the Start/Stop buttonX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 189).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to key position 1. When the driv-er's door is open, this corresponds to keyposition 0: "Key removed".If you turn off the engine with the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmissionshifts toN. If you then open one of the frontdoors, the automatic transmission shifts toP.If you drive through a car wash with a con-veyor, you can:Rswitch on the ignition using the Start/Stop button and shift the transmission toNRinsert the SmartKey into the ignitionlock, switch on the ignition and shift thetransmission to N

In the event of an emergency, the engine canbe turned off while the vehicle is in motion bypressing and holding the Start/Stop buttonfor three seconds. This function operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine switch-off function.

Parking 221

Drivingandparking

Z

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orthere is a malfunction in the system. Contacta qualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake performs a func-tion test at regular intervals while the engineis switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 189) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is automaticallyapplied when the transmission is in position Pand:Rthe engine is switched off orRthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and thedriver's door is opened.

To prevent the electric parking brake frombeing automatically applied, pull handle:.

222 ParkingDrivingandparking

The electric parking brake is also engagedautomatically if:RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRthe HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationaryRActive Parking Assist is holding the vehicleat a standstill

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthere is a system malfunction.Rthe power supply is insufficient.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally engaged if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is released auto-matically when all of the following conditionsare fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe seat belt has been fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the automatic transmission is in position R,the trunk lid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-tion P or you have previously driven fasterthan 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 222).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer electric parking brakehandle: is depressed, the greater the brak-ing force.During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release parking brakeRelease parking brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging and further damagedin the event of this occurring again.X Connect a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: observe theimportant safety notes for the high-voltagebattery (Y page 429).

Parking 223

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.

X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out at

224 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

regular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched on

These factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent brakingAn economical driving style specially requiresdriving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. onthe highway, only the bar for ConstantConstant willchange.The ECO display summarizes the driving char-acteristics from the start of the journey to itscompletion. For this reason, the bars changedynamically at the beginning of the journey.On longer journeys, there are fewer changes.For more dynamic changes, carry out a man-ual reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 300).

Driving tips 225

Drivingandparking

Z

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, applythe brakes occasionally while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out on

226 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to oper-ate the vehicle on such a dynamometer,please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in advance. You could other-wise damage the drive train or the brakesystem.

! Vehicleswith 4MATIC: the ESP® systemoperates automatically. The engine and theignitionmust therefore be switched off (theSmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or the Start/Stop button mustbe in position 0 or 1) if the electric parkingbrake is tested on a brake dynamometer.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may cause severe damage to the brakesystem.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: the ESP®system operates automatically. The engineand the ignitionmust therefore be switchedoff (the SmartKeymust be in position0 or1in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop buttonmust be in position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested usinga brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may cause severe damage to the brakesystem.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 77)and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)(Y page 77).

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brakedisks and brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz or that are ofan equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake disks and brakepads/linings on an axle at the same time.Always install new brake pads/linings whenreplacing brake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweightbrake disks to which the wheel assembly withrim and threaded connection is matched.The use of brake disks other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz can change thetrackwidth and is subject to approval, if appli-cable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakedisks, such as when changing wheels, canlead to a reduction in comfort when drivingwith lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks,particularly on the brake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on AMG vehicles.

Driving tips 227

Drivingandparking

Z

The AMG brake systems are designed forheavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adaptyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake wear warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messagesin the multifunction display. Especially forhigh performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

228 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 445).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 444).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 444).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands forinnovative driver assistance and safety sys-tems which enhance comfort and support thedriver in critical situations. With these intelli-gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benzhas set a milestone on the path towardsautonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewell thought out system – for the safety of thevehicle occupants and that of other roadusers.

Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 76).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. Change intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients. This is especially impor-tant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 229

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the speedometer, the seg-ments between the stored speed and themaximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Calling up the last speed stored

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates the

230 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

speed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, cruise control adjuststhe vehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press cruise the control lever for-wards: .

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.

Driving systems 231

Drivingandparking

Z

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

232 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.

This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you passvehicles driving on the left (left-hand drivecountries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you passvehicles driving on the right (right-handdrive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Driving systems 233

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.

Switching on

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed, or down= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: pastthe pressure point for a higher speed, ordown= for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS PassivePassivemes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

The set distance to a slower-moving vehiclein front will then not bemaintained. Youwillbe driving at the speed you determine bythe position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

234 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front. If novehicle is detected in front, your vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is driving ona different line from another vehicle. The vehi-cle then brakes automatically. Be ready tobrake at all times.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selects the drive programAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles):DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty drivingstyle when you select the S drive program

(Y page 200). Acceleration behind the vehiclein front or to the set speed is then noticeablymore dynamic. If you have selected the Edriving program, the vehicle acceleratesmore gently. This setting is recommended instop-and-start traffic.AMG vehicles: DISTRONIC Plus supports asporty driving style when you select the S orM drive program (Y page 200). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. When youselect the C drive program, the vehicle accel-erates more gently. This setting is recom-mended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph(70 km/h)Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.

Driving systems 235

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 238).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also beshifted into position P automatically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 237).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front as

236 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

required by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When you switch on DISTRONIC PLUS, trian-gle; shows the stored speed.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up. Thesegments likewise light up if a vehicle in frontis detected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 308) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 307).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text onlyappears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected

Driving systems 237

Drivingandparking

Z

= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-cle in front; adjustable

? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 308) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 307).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

238 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 239

Drivingandparking

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehiclein the center of the driving lane by means ofmoderate steering interventions at speeds of0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of camera system: at the top of thewindshield.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,taking into account lane markings, e.g. whenfollowing vehicles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on detected lane

markings (left and right), and only on the vehi-cle in front if lane markings are missing.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support if these conditions do notexist.DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order forthe function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.It cannot take account of road, weather andtraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-fic conditions. If you are following a vehiclewhich is driving towards the edge of the road,your vehicle could come into contact with thecurb or other road boundaries. Be particularlyaware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, thatare directly next to your vehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on thelane or projecting out into the lane are notdetected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.after intentionally driving over a lanemarking,can be corrected at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-cle back to the lane. In such cases, you muststeer the vehicle yourself to ensure that itdoes not leave the lane.

240 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no lon-ger assists you by performing steering inter-ventions if:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steeringwheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot areactivated again automatically after a lanechange is completed.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro-vide any support:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defectivetire has been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safetynotes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 232).The steering interventions are carried outwith a limited steering moment. The system

requires the driver to keep his hands on thesteering wheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the system will first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-bol appears in themultifunction display. If youhave still not started to steer and have nottaken hold of the steering wheel after fiveseconds at the latest, a warning tone alsosounds to remind you to take control of thevehicle. SteeringAssist andStop&GoPilot areswitched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUSremains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:DTR+:Steering Assist. OnSteering Assist. On message appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated but not ready for a steering interven-tion, steering wheel symbol: appears ingray. If the system provides you with support

Driving systems 241

Drivingandparking

Z

by means of steering interventions, sym-bol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:DTR+:SteeringSteering Assist.Assist. OffOffmessage appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotare deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Further information on deactivating theHOLDfunction (Y page 243).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all ofthe following conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastened.Rthe electric parking brake is released.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

242 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilë dis-appears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake. The HOLD function is then deacti-vated.

When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is openRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and:Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If a malfunction in the electric parking brakeoccurs, then the transmission may also beshifted into position P automatically.

Magic Body Control

General notesMAGIC BODY CONTROL consists of ActiveBody Control (ABC), ROAD SURFACE SCANas well as automatic vehicle stabilization inthe event of a crosswind.Your vehicle automatically adjusts its rideheight to improve driving safety and reducefuel consumption. The suspension mode isadjusted according to your selection (sportsor comfort), the road surface conditions andthe vehicle load. A multifunction cameradetects bumps in the road surface before thevehicle drives over them. This reduces chas-sis movements.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.

Driving systems 243

Drivingandparking

Z

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

! The vehicle is lowered when the engine isswitched off. When parking, position yourvehicle so that it does not make contactwith the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Yourvehicle could otherwise be damaged.

Crosswind AssistThe crosswind stabilization operates bychanging wheel loads through adjusting theABC spring struts. It reduces impairments inhandling when driving in a straight line andassists during countersteering.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h) when drivingstraight ahead or cornering gently.

Active Body Control ABC

Vehicle levelAll vehicles except AMG vehicles: depend-ing on the vehicle level that has been set, thevehicle automatically adjusts its heightdependent on the current speed. The vehicleis lowered by up to 0.6 in (15 mm) as thespeed increases. As the speed is reduced, thevehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.AMG vehicles: depending on the vehiclelevel that has been selected, the vehicle auto-matically adjusts its height dependent on thecurrent speed. The vehicle is lowered by up to0.4 in (10 mm) below the normal level as thespeed increases. As the speed is reduced, thevehicle is raised up to the set vehicle height.Select the "Normal" setting for normal roadconditions and "Raised" for driving with snowchains or in particularly poor road conditions.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Setting the raised vehicle levelX Start the engine.X If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicleheight is adjusted to raised level.

Setting the normal vehicle levelX Start the engine.X If indicator lamp;; is lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuningThe electronically controlled ABC suspensionsystem works continuously. This improvesdriving safety and comfort. The systemdetects the vehicle level and the vehicle loadand adjusts the setting accordingly. You canalso choose between a particularly sporty or acomfortable tuning.

244 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The ABC suspension system is tuned individ-ually to each wheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fortRthe vehicle loadRthe force of the side windYour selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

The firmer suspension setting in SPORTmodeensures even better contact with the road.The steering response behavior is sporty.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style on flat roads, e.g. on highways.Selecting the sports suspension tuningX If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. You have selec-ted the suspension for a sporty drivingstyle.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: theActive Body Control SPORTActive Body Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.AMGvehicles: the AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension Sys‐Sys‐tem SPORTtem SPORT message appears in the multi-function display.

In COMFORT mode, the driving characteris-tics of your vehicle are especially comforta-ble. The steering response behavior is bal-anced. Select this mode if you favor a com-fortable driving style.Selecting the standard comfort mode sus-pension tuningX If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. You have selec-ted the suspension for a comfortable driv-ing style.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: theActiveActive BodyBody ControlControl COMFORTCOMFORTmessageappears in the multifunction display.AMGvehicles: the AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension Sys‐Sys‐temtem COMFORTCOMFORTmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN

i This function is not available in all coun-tries.

Driving systems 245

Drivingandparking

Z

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitorsthe road in front of the vehicle using multi-function camera: at the top of the wind-shield. This function is automatically active ifyou select comfort suspension tuning. Thesystem is operational at speeds of up to81 mph (130 km/h).This function allows bumps in the road sur-face to be detected before the vehicle drivesover them. The spring struts are then actu-ated, with the result that chassis movementsare significantly reduced when driving overbumps.The system is deactivated when you selectthe raised vehicle level or sports mode.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthe road surface is insufficiently litRthere is poor visibility, e.g. snow, rain, fog orsprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or fromoncoming trafficRthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinityof the cameraRthe road surface has no texture or is reflec-tive, e.g. in the case of newly laid asphalt,concrete slabs or puddlesRthe distance to the vehicle in front is tooshortRsections of the route have a very smallradius of curvatureRyou accelerate hard or brake sharply

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension with variabledamping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possiblesuspension and constant ground clearance,even with a laden vehicle. When you drivefast, the vehicle is lowered automatically toimprove driving safety and to reduce fuel con-

sumption. There is also the option tomanuallyadjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists oflevel setting, level control and the AdaptiveDamping System ADS PLUS.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels. Select the "Nor-mal" setting for normal road surfaces and"Raised" for driving with snow chains or onparticularly poor road surfaces. Your selec-tion remains stored even if you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to thenormal level.

246 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising message appears inthe multifunction display.i The message disappears after ten sec-onds, irrespective of the level reached. Ifnecessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75mph(120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h)

Setting the normal vehicle levelX Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System ADS PLUSautomatically controls the calibration of thedampers.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

i You can choose between the sporty andcomfortablemode.One of the twomodes isalways active.

Sports tuning

The firmer suspension tuning in sport modeensures the best possible contact with theroad. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.All vehicles except AMG vehicles:X If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected. The vehicle is low-ered by 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to thenormal level.The AIRMATIC SPORTAIRMATIC SPORT message appears inthe multifunction display.

AMG vehicles:X If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If the drivingspeed is higher than 75 mph (120 km/h),the vehicle is automatically lowered byanother 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to thenormal level in sport mode.The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORTSPORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display .

Driving systems 247

Drivingandparking

Z

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. There-fore, select this mode if you favor a morecomfortable driving style. Select comfortmode alsowhendriving fast on straight roads,e.g. on straight stretches of highway.X If indicator lamp;; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Comfort tuningis selected.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: theAIRMATIC COMFORTAIRMATIC COMFORT message appears inthe multifunction display.AMGvehicles: the AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension Sys‐Sys‐temtem COMFORTCOMFORTmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If the driving speed is higher than 75 mph(120 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low-ered by another 0.4 in (10 mm) compared tothe normal level in comfort mode.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences inthe vehicle level by raising or lowering theaxles.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

248 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 415).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Driving systems 249

Drivingandparking

Z

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of thevehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of thevehicle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in theinstrument cluster. The warning display forthe rear area is located on the headliner in therear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera-tional readiness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

250 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 415).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking and when exit-ing a parking space. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 248).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

Driving systems 251

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 250) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects.

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 249).Active Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces at right angles to the direc-tion of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces that are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

252 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automat-ically when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the size of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. Youwill need to judge whether your vehicle willfit in the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-

er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Driving systems 253

Drivingandparking

Z

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times.When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe rear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display and a

warning tone sounds. The vehicle is nowparked. The vehicle is kept stationary withoutthe driver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled when youdepress the accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake appli-cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-ished, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionposition D. The vehicle redirects and doesnot drive as far into the parking space.Should the transmission change take placetoo early, the parking procedure will becanceled. A sensible parking position canno longer be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

254 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:message appears in the multifunction dis-play%.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit-ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-ing Assist will be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to themessage whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button(Y page 250).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is engagedRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction display

Driving systems 255

Drivingandparking

Z

shows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the COMANDdisplay.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.

Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when drivinginto a heated garage in winter, causing arapid change in temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 416)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).The guide lines in the COMAND display showthe distances to your vehicle. The distancesonly apply to road level.

i The rear view camera is protected fromraindrops and dust by means of a flap.When the rear view camera is activated,this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-essRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 416).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

256 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMAND (seeseparate operating instructions).

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The areabehind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.The image from the rear view camera isavailable throughout the maneuveringprocess.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Driving systems 257

Drivingandparking

Z

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: ifPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 250), anadditional operational readiness indicator willappear in COMAND display;. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in theCOMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 257).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully back up until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 257).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-

258 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ing space until yellow guide line; reachesparking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera toselect a wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 250), a symbol for your own vehicleappears in the COMAND display. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active,warning displays; light up in the COMANDdisplay in yellow or red respectively.

Driving systems 259

Drivingandparking

Z

Object detectionThe rear view camera can detect moving andstationary objects. If, for example, a pedes-trian or another vehicle is detected, theseobjects are marked with bars. The system isonly able to detect and mark stationaryobjects when your vehicle is moving. Whenthe vehicle is stationary, moving objects canbe detected and marked.To ensure that you can use the function, itmust be switched on in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrorsThe cameras capture the immediate sur-roundings of the vehicle. The 360° cameraassists you, for instance when parking or atexits with reduced visibility.The 360° camera images can be shown in fullscreenmode or in seven different split-screenviews on the COMAND display. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle.This view is calculated from the data suppliedby the installed cameras (virtual camera).The seven split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles withtrailer tow hitch)

Rtop view and images from the rear-facingside cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission fromD or R toN, the guide linesin the COMAND display are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may showa distorted view of obstacles, show themincorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera isnot a substitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneu-vering and parking. When maneuvering orparking, make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in the area inwhich you aremaneuvering.You are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to your surround-ings when parking and maneuvering. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwiseendanger yourself and others.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driv-ing into a heated garage in winter, causinga rapid change in temperature

260 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 416)Rif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.The guide lines in the COMAND display showthe distances to your vehicle. The distancesonly apply to road level.In trailer mode, the guide lines show the dis-tances at the level of the trailer coupling.The cameras in the front and in the rear areaare each protected by a flap. These flaps areopened when the 360° camera is activated.Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 416).For technical reasons, the flaps may remainopen briefly after the 360° camera has beendeactivated.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:RCOMAND is switched on (see the separateoperating instructions)RThe 360° Camera360° Camera function is switched on.i If the 360° camera is activated at speedsabove approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), awarning message appears.The warning message disappears if:Rthe vehicle's speed falls below approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360°camera is then activated.Rthe message is confirmed with the%button.

Switching the 360° camera on and offusing the button

X To switch on: press button:.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image fromthe front cameraRfull screen display with the image fromthe rear view camera

X To deactivate: press button: again.

i You can also switch to the split-screenview from the full-screen view.

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX Press theØ button in the center con-sole.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select the 360° camera: turn and pressthe controller.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

Further information on the COMAND control-ler can be found in the separate operatinginstructions.

Driving systems 261

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automati-cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMAND (seeseparate operating instructions).

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display in split-screenmode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and theimage from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide Z V the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:X 180° View180° View Turn and press the controller.i The 180° option is only available in thefollowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front cam-era

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thesystem in the following locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on thetrunk lid

Rvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the vari-ous cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

= Guide line for themaximumsteering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-

ing wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

262 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the front of thevehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis-tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Driving systems 263

Drivingandparking

Z

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing side camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exteriormirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side camera set-ting for the rear-facing view.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 250), warn-ing displays= in the COMAND display arealso active or light up accordingly.

PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,orRin the full screen view, on the right-handside at the bottomas red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

i The full screen display can also be selec-ted as front view.

Select this viewwhen you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.

i If you select the% symbol in the dis-play and confirm with the controller, thesplit-screen view appears.

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stoppedRwhen you select transmission positionP, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe view which was active before the 360°camera was displayed appears in theCOMAND display. You can also stop the 360°camera display split-screen view by selectingthe% symbol in the display and then con-firming with the COMAND controller.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-TIONASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-gue or increasing lapses in concentration onthe part of the driver, it suggests taking abreak.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to

264 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

recognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than125 mph (200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the active SteerAssist of DISTRONIC PLUSRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 308)of the on-board computer.

X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 307).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN-TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display infive levels from high to low.Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output awarning, the System PassiveSystem Passive messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 310).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Atten-tion Assist is adapted accordingly and thedriver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-ted, it is automatically reactivated after theengine has been stopped. The sensitivityselected corresponds to the last selectionactivated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: Attention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a break!Take a break!

Driving systems 265

Drivingandparking

Z

In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTcontinues to detect increasing lapses in con-centration, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed inCOMAND. You can select a service stationand navigation to this service station will thenbegin. This function can be activated anddeactivated in COMAND.

Night View Assist Plus

General notes

In addition to the illumination provided by thenormal headlamps, Night View Assist Plususes infrared light to illuminate the road.Night ViewAssist Plus camera;picks up theinfrared light and displays a monochromeimage in the multifunction display. The imageshown in the display corresponds to a road litup by high-beamheadlamps. This enables youto see the road's course and any obstacles ingood time. When pedestrian recognition is

active, pedestrians recognized by the systemare visually highlighted in color in the NightView Assist Plus display with small frame cor-ners.In addition, an infrared camera is integratedinto the radiator trim:. The camera helpsdetect pedestrians and animals. Observe thenotes on cleaning the infrared camera(Y page 417).

i Infrared light is not visible to the humaneye and therefore does not glare. NightView Assist Plus can therefore remainswitched on even if there is oncoming traf-fic.

Important safety notesNight View Assist Plus is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving. Do not relyon the Night View Assist Plus display. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Drive carefully and always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand traffic conditions.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,rain, fog or sprayRif the windshield is dirty, fogged up or cov-ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinityof the cameraRif the thermal imaging camera in the radia-tor grill is dirty, fogged up or coveredRon bends, hilltops or downhill gradientsRat high outside temperaturesNight View Assist Plus cannot display objectsdirectly in front of or beside the vehicle.It may be the case that other objects aremarked or highlighted as well as pedestriansand animals.

266 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Pedestrian and animal recognition

General notesPedestrian or animal recognition may beimpaired or inoperative if:Rpedestrians or animals are partially orentirely obscured by other objects, e.g.parked vehiclesRthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of theanimal in the Night View Assist Plus displayis incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by pow-erful light reflectionsRpedestrians or animals do not contrast withthe surroundingsRthe camera system no longer recognizespedestrians as persons due to specialclothing or other objectsRpedestrians are not in an upright position,e.g. sitting, squatting or lyingRanimals are not recognized by the system,e.g. because of their size or shape

The pedestrian and animal recognition isdeactivated at temperatures above 90‡(32†). The spotlight function and automaticdelayed switch-off are then no longer active.

Pedestrian recognition

: Night View Assist Plus display; Readiness symbol for active pedestrian

recognition= Highlighting? Pedestrian recognizedNight View Assist Plus can recognize pedes-trians using typical characteristics, e.g. the

body contours and posture of a person stand-ing upright.Pedestrian recognition is then switched onautomatically if:RNight View Assist Plus is activated.Ryou are driving faster than approximately6 mph (10 km/h).Rit is dark.If pedestrian recognition is active, readinesssymbol; appears. Persons who are detec-ted are highlighted by framing=. If thepedestrian recognition system has brought apedestrian to your attention, look through thewindshield to evaluate the situation. Theactual distance to objects and pedestrianscannot be gaged accurately by looking at ascreen.

Animal recognitionAnimals can be recognized in the followingsituations:RdarknessRoutside built-up areasRbelow an outside temperature of 90 ‡(32 †)

Night View Assist Plus can recognize largeranimals such as deer, cows or horses usingtypical characteristics.The system does not detect:Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and catsRanimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec-ognizable.

When detected, animals are marked withsmall color frame corners. In contrast topedestrian recognition, there is no separatereadiness symbol in the multifunction dis-play.

Driving systems 267

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching Night View Assist on/off

Activation conditionsYou can only activate Night View Assist Plus ifall of the following conditions are met:Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 189) orthe engine has been started.Rthe light switch is in theà or L posi-tion.Rreverse gear has not been engaged.

Activating Night View Assist Plus

X Press button:.The Night View Assist Plus display appearsin the multifunction display.

i The infrared headlamps only switch on inthe dark from speeds of approximately6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you donot have the full visual range while the vehi-cle is stationary and cannot check whetherNight View Assist Plus is working. The infra-red headlamps are deactivated at speedsbelow 3 mph (5 km/h). The Night Viewimage continues to be displayed until youdeactivate it by pressing button:.

Automatic activationYou can select the Night View AssistNight View AssistAutomaticAutomatic ActivationActivation option via the NightView Assist menu. The pedestrian and animalsearch function remains active evenwhen theNight View image is not displayed. In the dark,in unlit surroundings and at speeds of morethan 60 km/h, the Night View image is auto-matically displayed in the multifunction dis-

play as soon as pedestrians or animals aredetected.X In the assistance menu, select automaticdelayed switch-off of Night ViewAssist Plus(Y page 308).

Deactivating Night View Assist PlusX Press button:.The Night View Assist Plus display disap-pears from the multifunction display. NightView Assist is deactivated.

Spotlight function

General notesUnder certain conditions, the spotlight func-tion uses the headlamps to flash at detectedpedestrians.The spotlight function is only active if:Rpedestrian recognition is activeRthe road surface is not litRthe driving speed is at least 40 mph(60 km/h)Rthe "Adaptive HighbeamAssist PLUS" func-tion is activated (Y page 154)

The spotlight function is not active or is activeonly to a limited extent if:Ryou are driving in city trafficRthere are pedestrians located in the area ofan oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front

Activating the spotlight functionThe pedestrian detection with spotlight func-tion is running the background. If the prereq-uisites are met, the spotlight function usesthe headlamps to flash four short pulses at apedestrian detected on or near to the roadsurface.X In the light menu, select the spotlight func-tion of Night View Assist (Y page 312).

The spotlight function does not flash at ani-mals.

268 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display in the assistance graphic

Pedestrian symbol: in the assistancegraphic indicates the status of the spotlightfunction. If the symbol is displayed not filledin, the function is switched on. If the symbol isdisplayed filled in, the conditions for the spot-light function are met.Displaying the assistance graphicX Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphicmenu onthe on-board computer (Y page 307).

Driving systems 269

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with Night View Assist

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The picture quality ofNight View Assist Plushas deteriorated.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside.X Fold down camera cover (Y page 417).X Defrost the windshield (Y page 176).

The windshield is iced up.X De-ice the windshield (Y page 175).

The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 158).

The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in acar wash.X Clean the windshield (Y page 415).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.X Replace the windshield.

The pedestrian and ani-mal recognition is notavailable.

The infrared camera in the radiator grill is dirty.X Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance PLUS packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 231),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 270) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 273).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-cle, to monitor the area to the sides of thevehicle which the driver is unable to see. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lanes, youwill also receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-

ted, corrective braking may help you avoid acollision. Before a course-correcting brakeapplication, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu-ates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses radar sensors which arepointed in the direction of travel.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and isnot a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

270 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the device will voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator trim. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. Therear sensors must not be covered, e.g. bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the inner edgeof your lane.

Driving systems 271

Drivingandparking

Z

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).If you select the reverse gear, Active BlindSpot Assist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,gray radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display. Above aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of theradar waves in the assistance displaychanges to green;. Active Blind Spot Assistis then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You will then heara double warning tone and red warninglamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-ing of red warning lamp:. There are no fur-ther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

272 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display; underliningthe danger of a side collision appears in themultifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehi-cle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 309).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.Gray radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of camerasystem: at the top of the windshield. Vari-ous different areas to the front, rear and sideof your vehicle are alsomonitoredwith the aidof the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keep-ing Assist detects lane markings on the roadand can warn you before you leave your laneunintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.If you select kmkm in the Display UnitDisplay UnitSpeed-/Odometer:Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-boardcomputer (Y page 312), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot takeaccount of road and weather conditions. Itmay not recognize traffic situations. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

Driving systems 273

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump-ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g.obscured by snowRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand broken lane markings are detected, nolane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane, under certain circum-stances the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is meant to assist you in bringingthe vehicle back to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction dis-play. The brake application also slightlyreduces vehicle speed.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking rec-ognized as being solid or broken. Before this,a warning must be given by means of inter-mittent vibration in the steering wheel. In

274 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detec-ted in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles,overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacentlanes can be detected.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.Ran obstacle in the lane in which you aredriving has been detected.

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detectother road users or traffic situations. An inap-propriate brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist OnKeeping Assist On message appears inthe multifunction display. If all conditionshave been satisfied, a warning or steeringintervention may be made.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 307) are shown in green. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The ActiveLane Keeping Assist is deactivated. TheLane Keeping Assist OffLane Keeping Assist Off messageappears in the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist function (Y page 310).

X Select StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.When StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:

Driving systems 275

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Points to remember

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor. In HYBRID mode, the hybridsystem automatically selects the most effi-cient operating mode for every driving situa-tion. Drive the vehicle in the usual manner.To save fuel, in HYBRID mode, the hybridsystem switches off the combustion engineas often as possible during the journey whenpower output requirements are low. Whenpower output requirements are low, the elec-tric motor powers the vehicle. The engine isswitched on, even while the vehicle is inmotion, when a higher power output isrequired. The engine is usually switched off

when the vehicle is stationary. Consequently,there is usually no engine idling as with com-bustion engine vehicles.For pulling away and accelerating, the electricmotor supports the internal combustionengine using the power stored in the high-voltage battery. This energy is also used fordriving in partially electric mode, to operatethe electric refrigerant compressor and sup-port the 12 V on-board electrical system. Inthis way the hybrid drive helps to reduce yourvehicle's fuel consumption.Observe the driving tips on PLUG-IN HYBRIDoperation (Y page 287).

Recuperative Brake SystemIf you release the accelerator pedal when thevehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation isinitiated. The electric motor is operated as agenerator when in overrun mode and whenyou brake. Hybrid technology converts thekinetic energy of the vehicle into electricityand stores it in the high-voltage battery.Observe the important safety notes for theRecuperative Brake System (Y page 48).

Important safety notesIf the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you open the driver's door:Ramessage appears in themultifunction dis-play andRa warning tone soundsFurther information (Y page 340).All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe combustion engine is switched off andRthe READY indicator in the instrument clus-ter lights up

If you remove your foot from the brake pedalwhile in transmission position D or R, thevehicle may pull away automatically.Observe the notes on the READY display ofthe ECO start/stop function (Y page 288).

276 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Vehicles with an electric motor generatemuch less driving noise than vehicles withinternal combustion engines. As a result, yourvehicle may not be heard by other road usersin certain situations.Depending on the vehicle's equipment andcountry-specific regulations, the vehicle canbe equippedwith Acoustic Vehicle Indication.Acoustic Vehicle Indication generates a cer-tain sound at a speed between 0 and 20 mph(30 km/h). This helps other road users, par-ticularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear yourvehicle better. The sound can also be heardinside the vehicle.The volume depends on the engine speed.The faster you accelerate, the louder thesound is. At a speed of over 20 mph(30 km/h) the sound is switched off. Abovethis speed, the natural sounds from the vehi-cle are sufficient that it can be heard in goodtime by other road users.

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 277

Drivingandparking

Z

Hybrid system overview

: 12 V battery; Transmission with electric motor= Electric heater? High-voltage electrical system cablesA High-voltage batteryB Recuperative Brake SystemC Electric refrigerant compressorD Vehicle socketE ChargerF Voltage transformerG Power electronicsYou can deactivate the hybrid system manually. For further information on the high-voltageswitch-off device, see (Y page 47).

278 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Instrument cluster

: Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (Y page 366); Electric motor performance display (Y page 279)= Condition of charge display for high-voltage battery (Y page 281)? Driving mode display (Y page 280)A Electrical range

Displays and operation

Electric motor performance display

The power display for the electric motor islocated on the right-hand side of the instru-ment cluster.The current condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is shown as a percentage incondition of charge displayA. 100% corre-sponds to the highest possible condition ofcharge of the high-voltage battery.

There are two further areas located to the leftand right of condition of charge displayA:RArea: to; (E-DRIVE):This shows the electric output from theelectric motor, e.g. during electric opera-tion or in boost mode.When the motor is switched on, the displayis at lower limit;. With increasing pres-sure on the accelerator pedal the displayfills up from; to:.Drivingwith the electricmotor:when thedisplay reaches upper limit:, the com-bustion engine is switched on. If the displayis approaching upper limit: and youremove your foot from the acceleratorpedal, the display empties again. The com-bustion engine is not switched on. At lowspeeds, you can thereby control the elec-tric operation usage so that you only drivein electric mode.Drivingwith the combustion engine: theelectric motor supports the combustion

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 279

Drivingandparking

Z

engine by providing additional torque(boost mode) until the display reachesupper limit:.You can also select the operating mode ofthe hybrid system (Y page 280).RArea= to? (CHARGE):This shows the recuperated energywhich isstored in the high-voltage battery as elec-trical energy.When the display reaches lower limit?,the maximum recuperative braking powerhas been exhausted. Themechanical brakeis activated.

Selecting the operating mode

Button: allows you to choose between dif-ferent operating modes.X Press button: to change the operatingmode.The operating mode selected appears inthe instrument cluster (Y page 279).If it is not possible to change operatingmodes, the display message ChangeChange thethecurrent drive program beforecurrent drive program beforechanging the operating mode.changing the operating mode. orExitExit manualmanual drivedrive programprogram MM beforebeforechanging the operating mode.changing the operating mode.appears in the multifunction display. Fur-ther information on "Display messages"(Y page 340).

: Operating mode selected; Operating mode unavailable= Operating mode available

HYBRID RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal com-bustion engine is possi-bleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe high-voltage batteryis discharged to approx-imately 20%.RTo subsequently main-tain the condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery, the electricoutput is reduced. Allvehicle functions suchas electric mode,energy recuperation orboost mode, for exam-ple, are still available.

E-MODE RElectric-only driveRElectrical power outputallotted using the hapticaccelerator pedal(Y page 286)RInternal combustionengine activation usingthe haptic acceleratorpedal

280 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

E-SAVE RElectric mode or drivingwith the internal com-bustion engine is possi-bleRAutomatic selection ofdrive mode with electricmode as often as possi-bleRThe current condition ofcharge of the high-volt-age battery is main-tained so the electricalenergy can be used at alater time.

CHARGE RElectric drive is not pos-sibleRCharging the high-volt-age battery while driv-ing using the combus-tion engine

In automatic drive program S (Y page 285)and in manual drive programM (Y page 286),only HYBRID operating mode is available.If you switch from automatic drive program Sto automatic drive program E or E+, HYBRIDoperating mode continues to be selected.If manual drive programM is deactivated, theautomatic transmission shifts:Rinto the automatic drive program that waslast selectedRinto the drivingmode that was last selected

Operating the on-board computerYou can display the current operating condi-tion of the hybrid system in the multifunctiondisplay and the COMAND display(Y page 281).In the COMAND display, you can also call up agraphic display of the fuel consumption andgenerated electricity (Y page 285).

Menus and submenus

Selecting displays in the COMAND dis-playX Press buttonØ on the controller.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X To select EnergyEnergy FlowFlow: turn and press thecontroller.The energy flow is displayed.

X To select ConsumptionConsumption: turn and press thecontroller.Fuel consumption and the generated elec-tric energy are displayed.

X To exit the display: press the% buttonon the controller.

Selecting the energy flow display in themultifunction displayX UseÑ on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select Energy FlowEnergy Flow.The active hybrid components are highligh-ted in the energy flow display.

Energy flow display

Overview

: Internal combustion engine; Electric motor= High-voltage battery condition of charge

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 281

Drivingandparking

Z

? High-voltage batteryA Energy flowThe active hybrid components are highligh-ted.The energy flow is indicated by arrows. Thearrows have a different color depending onthe operating state.

Automatic engine switch-off

The engine and electric motor are switchedoff.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The condition of charge of the high-voltagebattery is shown when the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

Engine running while vehicle is stationary

The combustion engine is running while thevehicle is stationary. The high-voltage batteryis not being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The combustion engine is highlighted.

Charging while vehicle is stationary

The engine powers the electric motor. Theelectric motor operates as a generator. Thehigh-voltage battery is being charged.The arrow representing energy flow is shownin white.

Driving using the engine

The engine powers the vehicle.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.

Driving using the engine plus boost mode

282 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

If you rapidly depress the accelerator, theelectric motor supports the internal combus-tion engine by providing additional torque.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inred.

Driving using the engine plus energyrecovery

The engine powers the vehicle. The electricmotor is operating as a generator, e.g. inoverrun mode and when braking(Y page 289). The kinetic energy of the vehi-cle is converted into electrical energy. Thehigh-voltage battery is being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

Driving using the internal combustionengine and charging the high-voltage bat-tery

The engine powers the vehicle. The enginealso powers the electric motor. The electricmotor operates as a generator. The high-volt-age battery is being charged.

The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.

Driving using the internal combustionengine and discharging the high-voltagebattery

The engine powers the vehicle. If the vehicleis approaching a downhill gradient with a highpotential for energy recuperation, the condi-tion of charge of the high-voltage battery isintentionally kept low or intentionallyreduced.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.Further information about map-based energymanagement (Y page 289).

Electric operation mode

The electric motor powers the vehicle. Thehigh-voltage battery supplies energy to theelectric motor.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 283

Drivingandparking

Z

Electric operation mode and charging thehigh-voltage battery

The electric motor is operating as a genera-tor, e.g. in overrun mode and when braking.The kinetic energy of the vehicle is convertedinto electrical energy. The high-voltage bat-tery is being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

Charging the high-voltage battery whenstationary

The engine and electric motor are switchedoff.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery via:Ra mains socket (Y page 212)Ra charging station (Y page 216)Ra wallbox (Y page 215)

Displaying the total range and electricalrange

The approximate range is based on the cur-rent driving style.X UseÑ on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press: or9 to select the approxi-mate total range and electrical range.

284 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Displaying fuel consumption and generated electricity

: Fuel consumption; Electrical energy generatedEvery bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute.Fuel consumption indicator:may differ from the indicator in the FromFrom StartStart trip computerin the TripTrip menu.To reset values: the values are reset along with the FromFrom StartStart trip computer (Y page 300).X To select ConsumptionConsumption: turn and press the controller.Fuel consumption: and electrical energy; generated for the last 15 minutes are shownin the COMAND display.

Starting the engineThe vehicle starts in electricmodewithout theinternal combustion engine (noiseless start).The internal combustion engine starts onlyafter the power demanded by the driverexceeds the available power that the electricmotor can currently provide.Noiseless start operation is dependent on theoutside temperature and the operating tem-perature of the internal combustion engine. Ifnot all conditions for noiseless start operationare fulfilled, the vehicle starts with the inter-nal combustion engine.

X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal.X Observe the notes on starting the engine(Y page 191).

X Start the vehicle (Y page 192).The vehicle is operational whenREADY indi-cator: lights up.

Pulling awayX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X If the Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'display message appears in the multifunc-tion display, depress the brake pedal morefirmly and select the desired transmissionposition.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.For further information on pulling away(Y page 192).

Driving

Program selector button

Automatic drive programs E, S and E+

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 285

Drivingandparking

Z

X Press program selector button: tochange the drive program.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving character-istics.

E Economy RComfortable, economi-cal drivingRElectric operation modeis used as often as pos-sibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is available

S Sport RSporty driving style withboost modeRThe internal combus-tion engine is alwaysswitched on

E+ EconomyPlus

RComfortable, economi-cal drivingRElectric operation modeis used as often as pos-sibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is availableRDouble pulses in thehaptic acceleratorpedal, as an indicationto release the accelera-tor pedal (Y page 286)RAfter the acceleratorpedal has beenreleased, the coastingcharacteristics of thevehicle are adapted tothe traffic conditions.

For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 202).

Manual drive program MIn addition to automatic drive programs E andS, you can switch to manual drive programMusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.In manual drive program M, you can brieflychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D. In manual drive program Mthe internal combustion engine is alwaysswitched on.Activating when driving with the electricmotor:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 201).The combustion engine is switched on.Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear and M appear inthe multifunction display.

Activating when driving with the combustionengine:X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 201).Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear and M appear inthe multifunction display.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablein manual drive program M.

Haptic accelerator pedal

General notesThe haptic accelerator pedal helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.There are two different functions available forthis purpose:Ran additional point of resistance inE-MODEoperating mode (Y page 280)Ra double impulse in E+ operating mode(Y page 285)

286 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Additional point of resistance in the hap-tic accelerator pedalThe maximum available electric performanceis indicated by a tangible point of resistancein the haptic accelerator pedal.The additional point of resistance is availablein E-MODE operating mode (Y page 280)If you depress the haptic accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point, the combustionengine is switched on.

Double pulses in the haptic acceleratorpedalA tangible double pulse in the haptic acceler-ator pedal gives you a recommendation torelease the accelerator pedal. By this means,in HYBRID, E-MODE or E-SAVE operatingmode the combustion engine can be switchedoff and disconnected from the power train(overrun mode).The double pulse is available in drive programE+ (Y page 285).After the accelerator pedal has beenreleased, the coasting characteristics of thevehicle are adapted to the traffic conditions.To avoid getting too close to the vehicle infront, you must apply the brakes manuallywhen necessary.

Driving tips

General driving tipsDrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent andsudden acceleration as well as abrupt brak-ing.During partial electric driving, pulling awayand acceleration, the electric motor supportsthe internal combustion engine.During overrun in transmission positionD andbraking, the electric motor will operate as agenerator.Further information on the ECO start/stopfunction (Y page 288).Additional driving tips (Y page 224).

Stationary vehicleIf the vehicle is stopped, the combustionengine is, for the most part, switched off.Automatic climate control continues to func-tion. The electromechanically assisted steer-ing gear allows you to use the power steeringwithout reduced comfort.

AccelerationDepending on the operating mode, pullingaway and driving under low load conditionsare performed:Rentirely by electric propulsionRin combination with the internal combus-tion engine

When accelerating at an increased or fullload, boost mode is utilized. The electricmotor supports the internal combustionengine by providing additional torque whenthe accelerator is depressed rapidly.

Overrun mode or brakingThere are three possible operating modeswhen the hybrid vehicle is decelerating:Renergy recovery takes place even when thevehicle is decelerating purely in overrunmode (Y page 276). The electric motoroperates as a generator and stores therecovered energy in the high-voltage bat-tery.Rwhen the brakes are applied lightly, thevehicle is slowed down further by the elec-tric motor. This increases the energy recov-ery taking place (Y page 276). The electricmotor operates as a generator and storesthe recovered energy in the high-voltagebattery.Rwhen the brakes are applied with greaterforce, the service brakes are also used toslow the vehicle down. The two systemswork together.

Urban drivingEnergy is recuperated during frequent decel-eration and stopping in city traffic.

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 287

Drivingandparking

Z

The vehicle can be driven by the electricmotor alone up to a speed of approximately130 km/h.The vehicle is driven by the electric motoralone only when all conditions for the auto-matic engine switch-off are fulfilled.Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 288).

Driving on inter-urban roadsThe following phases are possible when driv-ing on inter-urban roads:Rrapid acceleration (boost mode)Rconstant energy consumptionRenergy recuperationRelectric operation modeA great deal of recovered energy may beavailable, depending on the route profile. Thisreduces consumption and emissions.

Highway drivingDuring highway driving, fuel consumption andemissions are favorably influenced in partic-ular by reduced power losses.The internal combustion engine will beswitched off automatically, if:Rthe driver removes his foot from the accel-erator pedal in drive program E and a speedof 130 km/h is not exceededRthe driver removes his foot from the accel-erator pedal in drive program E+ and aspeed of 180 km/h is not exceeded.

Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 288).

ECO start/stop function

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches theinternal combustion engine off automaticallywhen the vehicle stops moving and at highspeeds (Y page 289).All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. theautomatic climate control.

The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive programs E and E+. Electric-onlyoperation is only possible in drive programs Eand E+. Additional information for drive pro-grams E and E+ (Y page 285).

Automatic engine switch-offThe engine is switched off automatically,including when:Rthe driver removes his foot from the accel-erator in drive program E and a speed of130 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 289)Rthe driver removes his foot from the accel-erator in drive program E+ and a speed of180 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 289)Rthe engine has reached its operating tem-peratureRthe driver’s seat belt is fastened and thedriver’s door is closedRthe driver only slightly depresses the accel-erator pedal in order to, for example, main-tain the current speed for a limited distanceRthe hood is closed and engaged properlyRthe high-voltage battery is charged suffi-cientlyRthere are nomalfunctions in the hybrid sys-tem

The internal combustion engine will not beswitched off automatically, if:Rthe self-diagnosis function of the enginecontrol unit is still activeRthere is a malfunction in the hybrid systemRthe climate control of the vehicle requires itRthe high-voltage battery is being charged(Y page 282)Rautomatic emissions tests are running

288 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Automatic engine startThe automatically switched-off internal com-bustion engine starts automatically in certainsituations, if:Rthe power demand from the driver via theaccelerator pedal is greater than the elec-tric motor alone can provideRthe driver switches to drive program S orMRthe condition of charge of the high-voltagebattery has reached the lower limitRthe settings of the automatic climate con-trol require it, e.g. at external temperaturesabove 30 †

Overrun modeIn overrun mode, the combustion engine isswitched off and is disconnected from thedrive train. The electric motor:Rgenerates low thrust, which corresponds tothe overrun mode of an active combustionengineRfunctions as a generator and produces thenecessary energy for the auxiliary consum-ers and charges the high-voltage battery

Overrun mode is possible in the followingspeed range:Rin drive program E below 130 km/hRin drive program E+ below 180 km/hIn drive program E+, after the acceleratorpedal has been released the coasting char-acteristics of the vehicle are adapted to thetraffic conditions. Further information aboutthe haptic accelerator pedal (Y page 286).

Map-based energy managementFor map-based energy management, the sys-tem factors in information about the expec-ted route when route guidance is active.The information on the route is provided byCOMAND and includes the following:Rroad categoriesRspeed limitationsRdata on downhill gradients

The use of electric energy is automaticallyoptimally distributed from the beginning tothe end of the journey, using informationabout the route. The distribution is pre-emp-tive and takes into consideration:Rthe sections of the journey aheadRthe energy consumption on thewhole routeThe condition of charge of the high-voltagebattery is thus systematically controlled. Inaddition, the control function takes intoaccount that:Rthe fuel saving through the use of electricalenergy can vary, dependent on the route(e.g. urban, interurban or highway)Rthe use of electrical energy is held availablefor electric driving, particularly for urbanroutes

The vehicle thus automatically selects theoptimum driving mode for the respective sec-tion of the route.Map-based energy management is availableunder the following conditions:Rdrive program E+ is selectedRHYBRID driving mode is selectedRactive route guidance is activatedRsuitable map data is availableWhen map-based energy management isengaged, the area in front of the vehicle in themultifunction display will be green.

ParkingX Apply the electric parking brake.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.The READY indicator in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

Further information on parking and switchingoff the internal combustion engine(Y page 221).

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 289

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation

Internal combustion engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot start theinternal combustionengine. The multifunc-tion display shows nodisplay messages. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display isoff.

For example, the self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybridsystem is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Try to start the internal combustion engine again.If the internal combustion engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You wish to pull away,but the ECO start/stopfunction does not startthe internal combus-tion engine. The READYindicator in the multi-function display is off.

The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster light up.X Shift the transmission to P.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Start the engine.

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Recuperative Brake System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Braking resistance isreduced and brakepedal travel is longerthan usual.

G Risk of accidentThe Recuperative Brake System is malfunctioning.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 316).

X Observe the information regarding indicator and warning lampsin the instrument cluster (Y page 366) .

290 PLUG-IN HYBRID operationDrivingandparking

Hybrid system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The hybrid system wasdeactivated automati-cally.

You have been in an accident.The hybrid system remains deactivated if:Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a fewseconds.Rthe red SRS warning lamp 6 in the instrument cluster is lit.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The hybrid system wasdeactivated automati-cally. The multifunctiondisplay also shows adisplay message.

An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid system or anelectrical connection has been disconnected.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 316).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PLUG-IN HYBRID operation 291

Drivingandparking

Z

292

Useful information ............................ 294Important safety notes ..................... 294Displays and operation ..................... 294Menus and submenus ...................... 299Display messages ............................. 316Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 355

293

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.Only PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so andconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles:

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to doso. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 35).

Displays and operation

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

294 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is above 257 ‡(125 †) do not drive any further. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature is displayed in thelower section of the tachometer (Y page 35).Hybrid and PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: themultifunction display shows the coolant tem-perature in the CoolantCoolant submenu(Y page 307).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 296).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.Left control panel

ò RCalls up the main menu

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the track or station listand selects an audio track orvideo sceneRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or a telephonenumber

Displays and operation 295

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

9

:

Press and hold:RRapid scrolling in all listsRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone bookis open

a RIn all menus: confirms the selec-ted entry in the listRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the list of available radiosources/mediaRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialing the selected num-ber

ñ Switches off the Voice Control Sys-tem; see the separate operatinginstructions

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list orlist of available radio sources/mediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

ó Switches on the Voice Control Sys-tem; see the separate operatinginstructions

Multifunction display

: Top status bar; Display= Bottom status barX To call up the menu list in displaypanel ; : press theò button on thesteering wheel.Display panel; shows the selected menuor submenu and display messages.

Possible top status bar displays:Outside temperature (Y page 295)

# Turn signal, left (Y page 152)L Low-beam headlamps (Y page 151)K High-beam headlamps (Y page 152)T Parking lamps and license plate lamp

(Y page 151)! Turn signal, right (Y page 152)Possible bottom status bar displays:è ECO start/stop function

(Y page 193)READYREADY READY indicator (PLUG-IN HYBRID

vehicles) (Y page 285)

296 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

HYBRIDHYBRID Operating mode display (PLUG-INhybrid vehicles) (Y page 279)Electric range (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles)

ë HOLD function (Y page 242)j Active Parking Assist (Y page 251)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

(Y page 153)a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist

and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 240)Additional speedometer(Y page 313)

Head-up display

General notesThe head-up display projects informationfrom the navigation system and the driverassistance system above the dashboard intothe driver's field of vision.A requirement for the display of the contentsis that the following functions are available inthe vehicle and are switched on:RCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRNavigationThe head-up display allows the driver to seeall of the information without having to takehis eyes off the road.

Important safety notesThe head-up display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.The visibility of the head-up display is influ-enced by the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general ambient lightRsunglasses with polarization filtersRWet roadsRblocking of sunlight by objects on the dis-play cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections ofthe display may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the head-up display off and onagain.

i Vehicles with the head-up display areequipped with a special windshield. Shouldrepairs be necessary, have the windshieldreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on or off

X Press button:.When the head-up display is switched on,the display appears in the driver's field ofvision.AMG vehicles: press button: to changefromStandard on the AMGdisplay and thenpress button: to turn off the head-up dis-play.

Displays and operation 297

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Head-up display

Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display:: Navigation messages; Current speed= Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 231)

The selected cruise control speed (Y page 229)

Contents and Information in the AMG display in AMG vehicles:: Current engine speed; Current speed= Upshift indicator? Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually

298 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

In the Settingsmenu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options:RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 311)RSetting the position (Y page 311)RSetting the brightness (Y page 312)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheelto call up the list of menus and select a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 295).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 299)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 301)RRadioRadio menu (Y page 303)RMediaMedia menu (Y page 304)RTelephoneTelephone menu (Y page 305)RAssistance Info DisplayAssistance Info Display menu(Y page 307)RServiceService menu (Y page 307)RSettingsSettings menu (Y page 308)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 314)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu with

trip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

AMGvehicles: themenu only displays approx-imate range:.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the menu only dis-plays current fuel consumption;.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectapproximate range:, current fuel con-sumption; and recuperation display=.Approximate range: that can be coveredis calculated according to your current driv-ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank.If there is only a small amount of fuel left inthe fuel tank, the display shows a vehiclebeing refueledC instead of range:.Recuperation display= shows you ifenergy has been recuperated from thekinetic energy in overrun mode and savedin the battery. Recuperation display=

Menus and submenus 299

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

depends on the engine installed and istherefore not available in all vehicles.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: information ontotal range and electric range can be found inthe "PLUG-IN HYBRID drive" section(Y page 284).

ECO display

The ECO display is not available for AMG vehi-cles.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press:or9 to selectECOECO DisplayDisplay.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 225).

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average fuel consumption? Average speedX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 301).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

300 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Digital speedometer

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From start" trip computer arealso reset. If you reset the values in the "Fromstart" trip computer, the values in the ECOdisplay are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can findfurther information on navigation in the sep-arate COMAND operating instructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Menus and submenus 301

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane not recommended (dark gray)A Possible lane (light gray)B Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)On multilane roads, lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of direc-tion if the digital map supports this data. Dur-ing the change of direction, new lanesmay beadded.

Lane not recommended?: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will be able to completethe next change of direction in this lane only.Recommended laneB: in this lane you willbe able to complete the next change of direc-tion and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to bemade, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction. The change of directionstarts once the distance display reaches zero.

302 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNewNew route...route... or CalculatingCalculating route...route...A new route is calculated.ROff roadOff roadThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognized,e.g. newly built streets, car parks or privateland.RNo routeNo route

No route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Radio menu

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackA GenreStation; is displayed with the station fre-quency or station name. Thememory positionis only displayed along with station; if thishas been stored.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the RadioRadio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently selected station; appears inthe multifunction display.

X To open the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station listusing rapid scrolling: press and brieflyhold the: or9 button.

Menus and submenus 303

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X To select a waveband or station mem-ory: pressa briefly.

X Use: or9 to select the wavebandor station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i Storing the station in COMAND; see theseparate operating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information on radiomode in the "Satellite radio" section of theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and play-back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time inthe MediaMedia menu.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the followingmedia sources,for example:

RDisc (CD/DVD)RMemory card (SD/SDHC)RMEDIA REGISTERRUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® audio device

Observe the additional information on mediasupport and on media mode in the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

: Media source, e.g. name of current CD; Current title= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select audio player or data carrier:pressa briefly, to open the list of mediasources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or audio media.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

304 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

X To open the track list: press: or9briefly.

X To select next/previous track from thetrack list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a track from the track listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until the desired track isreached.If you press and hold the: or9button, the rapid scrolling speed isincreased. Not all audio drives or data car-riers support this function.

If the corresponding track information isstored on the audio drive or audio media, themultifunction display may display the follow-ing:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear inaudio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode:external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X To select DVD single drive or data car-rier: pressa briefly, to open the list ofmedia sources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD player or DVD media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the scene list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select the next or previous scenefrom the scene list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a scene from the scene listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until desired scene: isreached.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

Menus and submenus 305

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelephoneTelephonemenu, a displaymessage appearsin the multifunction display.If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill accept a call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill reject or end a call.

Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

306 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance graphic menu

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AssistanceAssistance InfoInfoDisplayDisplay menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.

X Press: to display the ATTEN-TION ASSIST assessment.

The assistance graphic displays the status ofand information from the following drivingsystems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 237)RSpotlight function of Night View Assist Plus(Y page 312)RDistance warning and the autonomousbraking function COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS (Y page 79)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 84)

RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 270)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 264)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 273)

Maintenance menu

Introduction

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 316)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 452)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 449)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 410).RDisplaying the coolant temperature (hybridor PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 307)RChecking the engine oil level using the on-board computer (Y page 407) (S 600, S600 MAYBACH and S 65 AMG only)

Displaying the coolant temperatureThe CoolantCoolant submenu is only present onhybrid or plug-in hybrid vehicles.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Menus and submenus 307

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Use: or9 to select the CoolantCoolantsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.The multifunction display shows the cool-ant temperature in a bar display.

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettingsmenu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging assistance settings(Y page 308)RChanging hybrid settings (PLUG-IN hybridvehicles) (Y page 310)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 311)RChanging the light settings (Y page 312)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 312)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 314)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" sectionin the description of ESP® (Y page 82).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFor further information about ESP®, see(Y page 81).X Start the engine.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectESPESP.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up continu-ously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 360).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 317).

Automatic activation of Night View AssistPlusX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

308 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use: or9 to select Night ViewNight ViewAssistAssist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

If Night View Assist Plus automatic activationis switched on, the night vision image is auto-matically shown in themultifunction display ifan object is detected.For further information about Night ViewAssist Plus (Y page 268).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use9 or: to select CollisionCollisionPreventionPrevention.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theAssistance GraphicAssistance Graphic menu.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 79).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistanceInfoInfo DisplayDisplaymenu in the multifunction dis-play.For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 84).

Activating/deactivating Active Blind SpotAssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

Menus and submenus 309

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,gray radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the Assis‐Assis‐tance Info Displaytance Info Display menu in the multi-function display.

For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 270).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectAttention AssistAttention Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic menu in the multifunction displaywhen the ignition is on.For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 264).

Activating/deactivating Active LaneKeeping AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAs‐DriveAs‐sistsist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectLane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection StandardStandard or Adap‐Adap‐tivetive is displayed.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 273).

Hybrid submenu (plug-in hybrid vehi-cles)

Setting the maximum charge currentBefore charging the high-voltage battery,check the maximum permissible charge cur-rent for the relevant power socket.If there are no charge current settings on thecharging cable, set the maximum charge cur-rent.The maximum charge current values in theon-board computer may deviate from thecharging cable values.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use:or9 to select the HybridHybrid sub-menu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the MaximumMaximumCharge CurrentCharge Current function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Setting the departure timeWith the Departure TimeDeparture Time function you canset the time by which pre-entry climate con-trol is to be complete and the high voltagebattery fully charged.

310 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

If a departure time is pre-selected, chargingstarts immediately. Further information canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop.Pre-entry climate control depends on thedeparture time set. Further information onpre-entry climate control (Y page 182).X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use:or9 to select the HybridHybrid sub-menu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Depar‐Depar‐ture Timeture Time function.You will see the selected setting.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Immediate charging without any depar-ture time set: use: or9 to selectNo Pre-selectionNo Pre-selection.

X Pressa to confirm.orX To set the departure time: use: or9 AA, BB or CC to select the required storagespace.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.

X Press: or9 to set the hours.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to set the minutes.X Pressa to confirm.If the transmission is in position P and thecharging cable connector is plugged in, themultifunction display will show the com-plete charging prediction after a fewmoments.

Further information on charging the high-volt-age battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)(Y page 210).

Head-up display submenu

Switching other displays on/offYou can switch the display of additional infor-mation on and off in the on-board computer. Ifthe head-up display (Y page 297) is activated,this will be shown on the windshield.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 buttons to selectDisplay ContentDisplay Content.

X Pressa to confirm.Switching the navigation messages dis-play on/offX Press thea button to save the setting.When you switch on the NavigationNavigation Mes‐Mes‐sagessages display, navigation messages areshown on the windshield when the head-updisplay is activated.

Further information on navigation (see theseparate operating instructions).

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the head-updisplay. This allows you to compensate fordifferences in the seat position.X Switch on the Head-up display(Y page 297).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 311

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Use the: or9 button to select thePositionPosition function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to set theposition from LevelLevel +5+5 (high) to LevelLevel -5-5(low).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the position of the Head-up display asa single memory preset (Y page 143).

Setting the brightnessThe brightness of the head-up display is auto-matically adjusted to the surrounding ambi-ent light. You can also individually adjust thebrightness of the head-up display.X Switch on the Head-up display(Y page 297).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Use the: or9 button to select theHead-up DisplayHead-up Display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightnessBrightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to set thebrightness from Level +5Level +5 (bright) toLevel -5Level -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Light submenu

Switching the spotlight function on/offX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Use: or9 to select the SpotlightSpotlightfunction.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When the spotlight function is activated,the assistance graphic shows the pedes-trian symbol.

Further information on the spotlight function(Y page 268).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunction dis-play are shown in white.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 150).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.

312 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RSpeedometerRDigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRAdditional speedometer in the status areaon the multi-function displayThe unit in the additional speedometer isdisplayed inversely to the selected dis-tance unit.ROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRCruise ControlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionAll vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi-cles: with the Permanent DisplayPermanent Display functionyou can switch on the outside temperature inthe status bar of the multifunction display.PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: with the Perma‐Perma‐nentnent DisplayDisplay function you can switch on thefollowing displays in the status bar of themul-tifunction display.

Routside temperatureRcoolant temperature (PLUG‑IN HYBRIDvehicles)Rthe total electric range (PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles)

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Perma‐Perma‐nent Displaynent Display function.

X Pressa to confirm.All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRIDvehicles: the current setting for OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature is shown.Only PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the cur-rent selection of Outside TemperatureOutside Temperature,Coolant TemperatureCoolant Temperature or ElectricElectricRangeRange is displayed.

X Only PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: selectthe desired option with: or9.

X To change the setting: pressa.

Switching the additional speedometeron/offUse the Additional SpeedometerAdditional Speedometer functionto choose whether the status area in the mul-tifunction display shows the speed digitally.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 313

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Use: or9 to select the Addi‐Addi‐tional Speedometertional Speedometer function.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

Restoring the factory settingsX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingsFactory Settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator

? Transmission fluid temperatureA Engine oil temperatureX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out other mes-sages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 160 ‡(71 †), the symbol in oil temperature displayA is shown in blue. Avoid driving at fullengine output during this time.If the transmission fluid temperature is below122 ‡ (50 †), the symbol in oil temperaturedisplay? is shown in blue. Avoid driving atfull engine output during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF)= Suspension tuning (SPORTSPORT/COMFORTCOMFORT)X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

314 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button repeatedlyuntil SETUP is displayed.

Menus and submenus 315

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the messagememory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 242)RParking (Y page 220)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press: or9 to select the message memory.If there are no display messages, you will see No MessagesNo Messages in the multifunction display.If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

316 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill StartAssist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane KeepingAssist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assistand Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only),÷ and!warninglamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNING

Display messages 317

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assistand Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

318 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, Hill Start Assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assistand Active Blind Spot are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 319

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,PRE‑SAFE®, theHOLD function, Hill Start Assist, Crosswind Assist,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, PRE‑SAFE®PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also havefailed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 222).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking(Y page 222).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Shift the transmission to P.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

320 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow!warning lamp and the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 222).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampcontinues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 466).X Shift the transmission to P.X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 321

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 222).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only)/!(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

322 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ParkingParking BrakeBrake Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Shift the transmission to P.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasetion to Releasethe Parking Brakethe Parking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

Display messages 323

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.USA only: the red$ brake system warning lamp also lights upwhile the engine is running.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

GInoperativeInoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐tive See Opera‐tive See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

324 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional. Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusInoperativeInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsLimited See Opera‐Limited See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 325

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotPossible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety systemis impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems areoperative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 415):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

326 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Check Left RearCheck Left RearBelt See Opera‐Belt See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual orCheck Right RearCheck Right RearBelt See Opera‐Belt See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear com-partment is not in the predefined position. The belt strap may bejammed in the belt tongue.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Release the jamming.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear com-partment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt buckleextender may be jammed.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Move the seat cushion forwards (Y page 123) and remove thecause of the jamming.

X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear com-partment is not in the predefined position. The seat belt may belocked.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Completely take off your seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

Display messages 327

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear com-partment is not in the predefined position. There is not enough beltslack in the system.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Loosen the seat belt.X Repeat the seat belt fastening procedure.

The seat belt buckle extender on the right or left of the rear com-partment is not in the predefined position. The assistance meas-ures specified have been carried out. There is still a malfunction.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see(Y page 49).

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

328 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGIf the seat belt buckle extender is not in the predefined position,the seat belt cannot provide the intended level of protection.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Perform the specified assistance measures when display mes-sage Check Left Rear Belt See Operator's ManualCheck Left Rear Belt See Operator's Manual orCheckCheck RightRight RearRear BeltBelt SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManual is shown(Y page 327).

If the display message does not disappear:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Center Mal‐Rear Center Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 329

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

330 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passengerseat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabledthe front-passenger air bag (Y page 60).Rthe display messages FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag EnabledEnabledSee Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger AirbagFront Passenger AirbagDisabledDisabled SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmust not appear in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.

Display messages 331

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 60).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbagAirbag EnabledEnabled SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has deactivated the front-passengerair bag (Y page 60).Rthe display messages FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag EnabledEnabledSee Operator's ManualSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger AirbagFront Passenger Airbag

332 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsDisabledDisabled SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmust not appear in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ONindicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS clas-sifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 60).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the lamp units:The display message for the corresponding light will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐Check Left Corner‐ing Lighting Light or CheckCheckRight CorneringRight CorneringLightLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 333

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Tail LampRight Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

334 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator’s ManualOperator’s Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Display messages 335

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssistAssist PlusPlus Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist Plus Cur‐Assist Plus Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, displaymessage AdaptiveAdaptive HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist PlusPlus AvailableAvailable AgainAgainis displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 408).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

?? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡ (125 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

336 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 257 ‡ (125 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 255 ‡ (124 †).

#SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRdefective power electronics (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles)Ra torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 337

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Observe the instructions in the# SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Start Engine SeeStart Engine SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-tance.The battery is being charged.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 405).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 407).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 405).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 407).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

338 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 405).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 407).

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

CC There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 339

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Hybrid system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

dVehicle Opera‐Vehicle Opera‐tional Switch thetional Switch theIgnition OffIgnition OffBefore ExitingBefore Exiting

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:You are exiting the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. TheREADY indicator in the multifunction display is on. A warning tonealso sounds.Please note the following: The electrical consumers are suppliedby the 12 V battery. If the vehicle is left in a ready-to-drive state foran extended period, it will switch off once the 12 V battery isalmost empty. It will then only be possible to start the vehicle usinga second battery (jump-starting).If you leave the vehicle:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

If you do not leave the vehicle:X Switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. automatic climate con-trol, seat heating.

iChangeChange thethe currentcurrentdrive programdrive programbefore changingbefore changingthe operatingthe operatingmode.mode. or Exit man‐Exit man‐ual drive programual drive programM before changingM before changingthethe operatingoperating mode.mode.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:You have attempted to change the operating mode when in auto-matic drive program S or manual drive program M.X Select drive program E or E+ (Y page 285).X Select the preferred operating mode HYBRID, E-MODE or E-SAVE (Y page 280).

Only E-MODE Avail‐Only E-MODE Avail‐ableable PowerPower LimitedLimitedRefuel ImmediatelyRefuel Immediately

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only:The fuel tank has been run dry and the combustion engine hasbeen switched off.A warning tone also sounds.The vehicle will be powered by electrical energy only. Performanceis restricted and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly than nor-mal.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.In the "Total range and electric range" menu, you can display theapproximate range of the vehicle (Y page 284).

340 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÛMalfunctionMalfunction

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.X Have the vehicle towed away by a professional recovery com-pany to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

dMalfunctionMalfunction

The drive system or fuel system is malfunctioning.The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning.The drive power is restricted.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀATTENTION ASSIST:ATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSISTInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle RisingPlease WaitPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Lowcle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a shortperiod.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Display messages 341

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontfender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movementis too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise thevehicle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨MalfunctionMalfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-acteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABC MalfunctionABC MalfunctionStop VehicleStop Vehicle

The Active Body Control (ABC) vehicle level is too low.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the displaymessage disappears.

The vehicle is leaking oil.The display message is shown continuously.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is shown continuously.Active Body Control (ABC) is malfunctioning.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontfender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movementis too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ABCABC VehicleVehicle RisingRisingPleasePlease WaitWait BrieflyBriefly

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

342 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ABC MalfunctionABC Malfunction The Active Body Control (ABC) function is restricted. The vehicle'shandling characteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist Cur‐ing Assist Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inop-erative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended periodRthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Clean the windshield.

Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist Inoper‐ing Assist Inoper‐ativeative

Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 343

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Active Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Restart the engine.

Active Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐Park Assist Can‐celedceled

The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process withthe driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 251).

ParkPark AssistAssist Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 251).

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

344 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbolis not shown in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Night View AssistNight View AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐ableable

Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the systemwill switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-play message disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Night View AssistNight View AssistInoperativeInoperative

Night View Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Spotlight Inopera‐Spotlight Inopera‐tivetive

Night View Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rthe camera in the radiator trim is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthe outside temperature is too high.X Clean the windshield.X Clean the camera in the radiator trim.If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside tem-peratures, the systemwill switch back on automatically once it hascooled down.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-play message disappears.Night View Assist Plus is operational again.

Display messages 345

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Night View Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 242).

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 231).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 231).

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

346 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Sus‐Sus‐pendedpended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 231).

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. Inopera‐Assist. Inopera‐tivetive

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 229).

Display messages 347

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Soonsure Soon

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 423).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 452).

Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐sure Then Restartsure Then RestartRun Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 452).

RunRun FlatFlat IndicatorIndicatorInoperativeInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

348 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Please CorrectPlease CorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 449).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 451).

Check TiresCheck Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 423).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 449).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Display messages 349

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 423).

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Currentlytor CurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a strong source of radio interference, no signals can bereceived from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor istemporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐tor Inoperativetor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

350 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Shift to 'P' orShift to 'P' or'N''N' toto StartStart EngineEngine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply Brake toApply Brake toShift from 'P'Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Transmission NotTransmission Notin P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away

The driver's door is open/not completely closed and the trans-mission is in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Close the driver's door completely.

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐function Stopfunction Stop

A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com-ponents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts toposition N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Display messages 351

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

NN The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

MM The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Close the hood.

CC At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

To view the ext.To view the ext.mirror, adjustmirror, adjustfront-passengerfront-passengerseatseat oror removeremove thethehead restraint.head restraint.

The front-passenger seat is in the chauffeurmode position and thehead restraint is folded down.

G WARNINGIf the front-passenger seat is in the chauffeur mode position andthe head restraint is folded down, the view of the front-passengerexterior mirror can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Remove the head restraint on the front-passenger seat(Y page 129).

orX Move the front-passenger seat into the normal position(Y page 127).

352 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front-PassengerFront-PassengerSeat Cannot BeSeat Cannot BeUsedUsed VisitVisit WorkshopWorkshop

RThe front-passenger seat cannot be moved from the chauffeurmode position into the normal position. There is a malfunction.RThe front-passenger seat head restraint is folded down andthere is a malfunction. The head restraint can no longer be fol-ded up.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not adjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended.There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.X Do not use the front-passenger seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

nBeforeBefore oper.oper. front-front-pass. seat frompass. seat fromrear, deactiv.rear, deactiv.override feature.override feature.

You have attempted to adjust the front-passenger seat from therear while the override feature was activated.X Deactivate the override feature for the rear side windows(Y page 75).

X Adjusts the front-passenger seat from the rear (Y page 124).

ÐPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function See Oper‐function See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 409).

Display messages 353

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 94).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened thedriver's door with the engine switched off.This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 secondsand is simply a reminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

The SmartKey is currently undetected.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Locate the SmartKey.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.

354 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,the key is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into keymode.

ÂRemoveRemove 'Start''Start' But‐But‐ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected.The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction oris faulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fastentheir seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addi-tion, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 355

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon asthe driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle isbeing driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph(25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

356 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lampis lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lampis lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine isrunning. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol.The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 357

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. ThereforeBAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist,Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and ActiveBlind Spot Assist are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems,such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not beavailable.

358 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS withCross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®,PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill startassist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 359

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

$J÷!

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, theyellow ESP® warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while theengine is running.ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BASPLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD,PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill startassist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist andActive Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding orat least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 82), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 82).

360 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active LaneKeeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunc-tion.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 82), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 82).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 361

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electricparking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electricparking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme-diately.

For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 49).

362 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

; N The yellowCheck Engine warning lamp lights upwhile the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-gency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work-shop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshopas soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarning lamp lights up. This is due to thelegal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether suchlegal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctlyor the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 363

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer beingmonitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under anycircumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

364 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blockedor the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 408).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolantsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. bysnow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 257 ‡(125 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainousterrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 255 ‡ (124 †). The airflow to theengine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drivewhen your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluidswhichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which canoccur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 365

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 408).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolantsystem checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. bysnow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 257 ‡ (125†), you can continue driving tothe nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainousterrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Hybrid system

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

é N The yellow RBS (recuperative brake system) warning lamp is on. In addition,there may be a warning tone.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning. Pedal travel may be longer than usual and brakingperformance may be affected. The automatic engine switch-off function mayalso be deactivated.X Observe the messages in the multifunction display (Y page 316).X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

366 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

$ N The red brake system warning lamp is on. A warning tone also sounds.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning. Pedal travel may be longer than usual and brakingperformance may be affected.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Driving systems

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Awarning tone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel attoo high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 84).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 80).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 367

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)is lit.The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of thetires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers.Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 220).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 423).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 449).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

368 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialistworkshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 369

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

370

Useful information ............................ 372Stowage areas ................................... 372Features ............................................. 378

371

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (including occu-pants). The values are specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-sible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.

372 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 372).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can be cooled (Y page 185).The glove box contains a coin holder, a penholder, three credit card holders and a holderfor the COMAND remote control.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and theeyeglasses compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartments in the center con-sole

X To open: briefly press marking;.X To close: push stowage compartment:in the direction of the arrow until itengages.

Stowage areas 373

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X Toopen: press button: or; and fold thearmrest to the left or right.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USBport, an AUX-IN jack or a Media Interface areinstalled in the stowage compartment. AMedia Interface is a universal interface forportable audio or video equipment, e.g. for aniPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the sepa-rate COMAND operating instructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver'sseat and front-passenger seatG WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stow-age compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

Stowage compartments in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled up fluo-rescent jacket and a small umbrella in stow-age compartment; in the doors.In doors: you can store bottles with a capa-city of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest

374 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull handle: and fold the armrestsupwards.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outerseats:X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Stowage compartment in the rear-com-partment center console

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rearX Pull up on handle: and fold the armrestupwards.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a USBport, an AUX-IN jack, a mobile phone bracketor a 115 V or 230 V socket are installed in thestowage compartment.

Stowage box in the rear seat backrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

Vehicles with a rear bench seat:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outerseats:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

Stowage areas 375

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with individual seats and center con-sole in the rear:X To open: fold down the rear armrest.X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a DVDplayer is installed instead of a stowage com-partment.

Folding tableG WARNINGIf the folding table is folded out while the vehi-cle is in motion, passengers can be thrownagainst it, particularly in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or a sudden change ofdirection. There is a risk of injury.Fold the folding table away before each jour-ney.

X To fold out: open rear armrest:(Y page 375).

X Pull the folding table forwards and upwardsby recess; or= and swing outwards.

X Fold the table panels apart.X To fold in: fold the table panels togetherand swing in the folding table.

Stowage netsStowage nets are located:Rin the front-passenger footwellRon the back of the driver's and the front-passenger seatRon the left and right-hand side in the trunk

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 372)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 372).

Securing loads using parcel net hooks

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RSecure the load using the parcel net hooks.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

Vehicles without PLUG-IN hybrid drive

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles

There are four parcel net hooks or two parcelnet hooks (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) in thetrunk.

376 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage well under the trunk floorUnder the trunk floor you can find a multi-purpose recess, e.g. for TIREFIT.

X To open: open the trunk lid.X Holding the ribbing, press handle; down-wards.Handle; folds upwards.

X Swing trunk floor: upwards using han-dle; until it rests against the trunk parti-tion.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of thetrunk floor.

X Clip hook= into groove?.X To close: unclip hook= from groove?.X Fasten hook= to the bracket on theunderside of the trunk floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

Youwill find information on themaximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 495).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel fully andopen the trunk lid fully when the roof carrieris installed.

! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-ers, do not use metallic or hard objects toopen them.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Stowage areas 377

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with a panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel cannot beopened if a roof carrier is installed. The pan-orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel canstill be raised to allow ventilation of the vehi-cle interior.If the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel makes contact with a roof carrierapproved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof willlower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Fold covers: upwards in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-age points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.

RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 372).

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 373).

X To remove: slide catch: forwards andpull the cup holder upwards.

X To insert: make sure that the head unitcover is closed.

X Insert the cup holder and slide catch:back.

You can remove the cup holder and the rub-ber mat for cleaning. Clean them with clean,lukewarm water only.

378 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

Vehicles with a rear bench seat! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rearbench seats! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press down base; of the cupholder in the middle until it engages.

X To close: press closing button:.Base; of cup holder pops up.

The cup holder insert can be removed forcleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm wateronly.

! Please do not pull out the cup holderinsert any further than 15 mm. Otherwise,the wooden trim on the rear seat armrestcould be damaged.

X To remove the insert: press downbase=of the cup holder in the middle until itengages.

X Press both retaining clips; and pull thecup holder insert upwards approximately15 mm.

X Press button:.Base= of cup holder pops up.

X Remove the insert from the rear seat arm-rest completely.

Features 379

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

! Make sure that the cup holder insert hasbeen inserted into the recess correctly.Otherwise, the wooden trim on the rearseat armrest could be damaged.

X To install the insert: make sure thatbase; of the cup holder is in the upperposition.

X Place the cup holder insert into the recessin the rear seat armrest such that button:is facing forwards.

X Press the cup holder insert down.X Press outer ring= of the cup holder insert,until the cup holder insert engages audibly.

Temperature controlled cup holder inthe rear compartment

Example: Sedan: Cup holder; SwitchThe temperature-controlled cup holder canbe used to keep cold drinks cool and warmdrinks warm.

When you use the warming function, themetal insert of the cup holder is heated.Therefore, do not touch the cup holder insert.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To switch on the cooling function: pressand hold button; until the blue indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch on the heating function: pressand hold button; until the red indicatorlamp on the button lights up.

X To switch off the function: press and holdbutton; until the indicator lamp on thebutton goes out.

The rubber mat can be removed for cleaning.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean thecup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

380 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of bracket=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.X Fold down additional sun visor; to thewindshield.

Rear side window roller sunblinds

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

The sunblinds for the rear side windows canbe operated with the buttons for the side win-dows.The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.X To close fully: pull the correspondingswitch when the side window is closed.

X To open fully: press the correspondingswitch.

i You can use the switches on the reardoors to close the rear roller sunblinds forthe opposite side.

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen extending or retracting, parts of thebody could become trapped within the sweepof the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.When extending or retracting, make sure thatno one has any parts of the body within thesweep of the roller sunblind. If someonebecomes trapped, briefly press the buttonagain. The opening or closing procedure willbe stopped.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

At temperatures below Ò4‡ (Ò20†) the rollersunblind cannot be operated.

Features 381

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Extending/retracting from the driver'sseat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To extend or retract: briefly press but-ton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Extending/retracting from the rear

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 189).

X To extend: pull switch: upwards and letgo.The roller sunblind extends fully.

X To stop extending: press switch: down-wards briefly.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenretracts again.

X To retract: press switch: beyond thepoint of resistance and let go.The roller sunblind retracts fully.

X To stop retracting: pull switch:upwards.The roller sunblind stops briefly and thenextends again.

When the override feature for the rear sidewindows is activated (Y page 75), the switchu cannot be operated. The roller sunblindcan only be extended and retracted from thedriver's seat.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

X To open: briefly press marking?.Stowage compartment= opens.

X To remove the insert: grip the sides ofinsert:, push it forward and pull itupwards;.

X To re-install the insert: press insert:into the drawer until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartment=closed until it locks.

382 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Rear-compartment ashtray

The ashtray is located in the stowage com-partment in the rear door. To use it, you canplace it in a cup holder or hold it in your hand.X Remove the ashtray from retainer: in therear door.

X To open: fold lid; upwards.X To close: press lid; downwards.If you are not using the ashtray, close it andplace it in the retainer in the rear door.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment; opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter: will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartment;closed until it locks.

Cigarette lighter in the rear compart-ment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Vehicles without a Rear Seat EntertainmentSystemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

Features 383

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter: will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press cover; closed until itlocks.

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter: will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press cover; closed until itlocks.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: Sedan

X Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as chargers formobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: briefly press marking=.Stowage compartment: opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: press stowage compartment:closed until it locks.

384 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the rear compartment

Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri-cally adjustable rear seats

Vehicles without a Rear Seat EntertainmentSystemX To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until itlocks.

Vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment Sys-tem:X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.X To close: press cover; closed until itlocks.

On vehicles with a 115 V socket, there is no12 V socket in the center console in the rearcompartment.

Vehicles with individual seats in the rear

Example: SedanX Press lid: of the socket compartmentbriefly.The socket compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Socket in the trunk

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Features 385

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides an alter-nating voltage of 115 V so that small elec-tronic devices can be connected. These devi-ces, such as games consoles, chargers andlaptops, must not consume more than a max-imum of 150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect hasa suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a per-missible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the center console inthe front compartment (Y page 384) and inthe trunk are functional (Y page 385).

Using the 115 V power socket

The 115 V socket is in the center console inthe rear compartment on vehicles with a rearbench seat or electrically adjustable rearseats.X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

The 115 V socket is in the armrest on vehicleswith individual seats in the rear.X Open the armrest (Y page 375).X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.

386 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from115 V socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 387

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 430).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Coolbox in the rear compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you cover the ventilation grille for the cool-box, it may overheat. There is a risk of fire.Always make sure that the ventilation grille isnot covered.

The ventilation grille for the coolbox is in thetrunk.The coolbox can bear a maximum load of7.7 lb (3.5 kg).If you want to store a bottle in the upper com-partment of the coolbox, the capacity of thebottle must not exceed 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).Store only plastic bottles in the upper com-partment of the coolbox.

Using the coolbox

X Vehicles with rear seat armrest: folddown the rear seat armrest.

X Pull handle: and fold down cover;.

388 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: pull handle: on the cover.X Fold the cover out to the front.X To switch cooling level to low: press but-ton; once.An indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To switch cooling level to high: pressbutton; twice.Both indicator lamps in the button light up.

X To switch off cooling: press button;repeatedly until the indicator lamps go out.

The cooling output of the coolbox depends onthe ambient temperature and the selectedcooling level.The coolbox reduces its cooling output orswitches off, if:Rmany electrical consumers are turned onRthe starter battery is not sufficientlycharged

This is indicated by the flashing indicatorlamps in the button. The cooling function willautomatically switch back on as soon as thereis sufficient voltage.

Caring for the coolboxIf you do not need to use the coolbox for anextended period you should switch it off,defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leavethe lid open for a time.

Removing and installing the coolbox

You can remove the coolbox for maintenancepurposes.X To remove: switch off the coolbox.X Pull plug; down and out.X Unscrew both screws=.X Pull out the coolbox.X Close flap:.X To install: swing flap: to the side until itis locked in place by the magnets.

X Insert the coolbox.X Tighten both screws=.X Connect plug;.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in theUSA.You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007

Features 389

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by mail. You can use this pass-word to log onto thembrace area under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently chargedDetermining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the COMAND volume control.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description ofall available features under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe InoperativeInoperative or the Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diag-nosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007

390 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 389).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered. You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.

All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

Features 391

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emer-gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-ately after pressing the SOS button, you willnot know whether mbrace placed the emer-gency call. In this case, always summon assis-tance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND display indicates that a call isactive. During the call, you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI buttonon COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 396).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.You can findmore information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND buttonfor ending a phone call.

392 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-ton:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be established, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in the multi-function display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND display indicates that a call isactive. During the call, you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVI buttonon COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on thembrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

The system has not been able to initiate anMB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button

ï is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND buttonfor ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button in COMAND toend the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected toCOMAND.However, if you want to use your mobilephone, do so only when the vehicle is station-ary and in a safe location.

Features 393

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availa-ble if:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigationsystem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance functioneven if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav-igation system.Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation sys-tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-scription must be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destinationaddress into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).The transmitted destination address is loa-ded into the vehicle's navigation system.

394 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination mustbe confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicleswith mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail-able if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can beused when you have forgotten to lock thevehicle and you are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closingmaybe delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

Features 395

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind ofassistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter.The Roadside Assistance ConnectedRoadside Assistance Connectedmessage appears in the display. If the VehicleHealth Check can be started, the RequestRequestfor Vehicle Diagnostics Receivedfor Vehicle Diagnostics ReceivedStart vehicle diagnostics?Start vehicle diagnostics? messageappears in the display.

X Press the YesYes button to confirm the mes-sage.

X When the Vehicle DiagnosticsVehicle DiagnosticsPlease Start IgnitionPlease Start Ignition messageappears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 189).

X If the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.your vehicle to a safe position.message appears: please follow theinstructions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see theVehicleVehicle DiagnosticsDiagnostics ActiveActivemessage.If you select CancelCancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the SendingSendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voicevehicle diagnostics data. (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐connection may be interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent.X Press the OKOK button to confirm the mes-sage.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data...ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contactedat a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Checkis the transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is due, the dis-play shows a message to this effect togetherwith information about any special offers atyour workshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

396 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 30).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 26).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the ExternalExternalroute "Route name" has been savedroute "Route name" has been savedunder "Last destinations". Startunder "Last destinations". Startnavigation?navigation? message on the COMAND dis-play.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.If you select NoNo the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

Downloaded and saved routes can be calledup again.You can find further information in the sepa-rate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instruc-tions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.

The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.These settings can be called up under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-

Features 397

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 28).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 398).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicator

398 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

lamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code(Y page 399).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 398).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button onthe door drive control panel. The program-ming button may be positioned at differentlocations depending on the manufacturer. Itis usually located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-

gramming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,= or? on the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-ture a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

Features 399

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.

RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebuttonwhich you are programming. Try var-ious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote con-trol. Before performing these steps, makesure that new batteries have been installedin garage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if neces-sary.

400 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat:slide the respective seat back.

X Rear seats: slide the respective seat for-wards.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press studs: onto retainers; until youhear them engage.

X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Infrared reflective windshield

The infrared reflecting glass prevents thevehicle interior from becoming too hot. It alsoblocks radio waves up into the gigahertzrange.In order to operate radio-controlled equip-ment, e.g. toll systems, areas: on the wind-shield are permeable to radio waves. You caninstall radio-controlled devices in theseareas.These areas can best be seen from outsidethe vehicle by observing the light reflected offthe windshield.

Features 401

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

402

Useful information ............................ 404Engine compartment ........................ 404ASSYST PLUS .................................... 410Care .................................................... 411

403

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

404 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.Once you have lifted the hood about15 inches (40 cm), it is automaticallyopened the rest of the way and held openby the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick (except S 600 and S 65 AMG)

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 405

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engineoil.

406 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer (S 600 and S 65 AMG)X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Use: or9 to select the Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level submenu.X Pressa to confirm the selection.The MeasuringMeasuring engineengine oiloil levellevel accurateaccurate onlyonly whenwhen vehiclevehicle isis levellevelmessageappears in the multifunction display.

The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in themultifunction display:

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

EngineEngine OilOil LevelLevel OKOK The oil level is correct.

Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 Liter)Liter)

The oil level is too low.X Top up 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Reduce Engine OilReduce Engine OilLevelLevel

The engine oil level is too high.X Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

For Engine OilFor Engine OilLevel IgnitionLevel IgnitionMust Be OnMust Be On

The ignition is switched off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Need More Time toNeed More Time toCheck Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel

The required waiting period was not observed.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: repeat themeasurement after about five minutes.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: repeat the measurement afterapproximately 30 minutes.

Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelNot MeasurableNot Measurablewithwith EngineEngine RunningRunning

The engine is running; oil level measurement is not possible.X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating temperature: wait about fiveminutes before carrying out the measurement.If the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if theengine was only started briefly: wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.

Engine compartment 407

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 405).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 491).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. When

408 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

opening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

orX Press Start/Stop button twice(Y page 189).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 189) in the ignition lock.

orX Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 189).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.

If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the second cool-ant expansion tank must not be filled.For further information on coolant, see(Y page 493).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Engine compartment 409

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Place cap: on the edge of the filler neckand engage in place.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 353).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 494).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 405).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the typeof service. AA stands for a minor service and BBfor a major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch the ignition on.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu andpressa to confirm.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS sub-menu and pressa to confirm.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-

410 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Care 411

Maintenance

andcare

Z

After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position0.Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera isswitched off.

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in neutral position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle may otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor when the engine is switched off orat very low speeds. Otherwise, when in

transmission position D or R the auto-matic transmission will automaticallyswitch to park position P and block thewheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmis-sion will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position Nneutral:Operating with the SmartKey:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button:X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Engage park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 189).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

412 CareMaintenance

andcare

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each coun-try.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the followingsituations, for example, could lead to theunintentional opening of the trunk:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completely

Care 413

Maintenance

andcare

Z

repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.

wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approved Mercedes-Benzcare products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

414 CareMaintenance

andcare

should drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield (Y page 158).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlightswith awet sponge and amild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between

Care 415

Maintenance

andcare

Z

the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear view cam-era: with COMAND activated call up thevehicle menu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System SettingsSystem Settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Rear View CameraRear View Camera: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Open Camera CoverOpen Camera Cover: turn andpress the controller.The rear view camera cover opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the 360° camera:with COMAND activated, call up the vehiclemenu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System SettingsSystem Settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select the 360°360° CameraCamera: turn and pressthe controller.

416 CareMaintenance

andcare

X To select Open Camera CoverOpen Camera Cover: turn andpress the controller.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the 360° camera: clean cameralens: with clean water and a soft cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360°camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning Night and Day View Assist

Cleaning the camera behind the wind-shield! Never clean the camera lens.When clean-ing the field of vision of the driving systems,make sure that you do not spray glasscleaner on the camera lens. If the cameralens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Fold down the camera cover by recess:.

Care 417

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield infront of camera;.

Cleaning the camera in the radiator trim

Camera lens: is cleaned at regular intervalsby operating the windshield washer system.X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens: when it is very dirty.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA

418 CareMaintenance

andcare

covers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entire

seat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 419

Maintenance

andcare

Z

420

Useful information ............................ 422Where will I find...? ........................... 422Flat tire .............................................. 423Battery (vehicle) ................................ 427Jump-starting .................................... 432Towing and tow-starting .................. 435Fuses .................................................. 438

421

Roadside

Assistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the stowage wellunder the trunk floor.

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-tions, the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. Formore information on which tire changingtools are required and approved to performa wheel change on your vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Tools required for changing a wheel mayinclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Example: Tire sealant filler bottle; Tire inflation compressor= Towing eyeX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 377).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 424).

AMG vehicles

Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible

: Tire sealant filler bottle; Jack= Ratchet? Alignment boltA Jacking supportB SocketC Lug wrenchD Towing eyeE Folding wheel chockF Tire inflation compressor

422 Where will I find...?Roadside

Assistance

The tire-change tool kit is kept in a tray in thestowage well under the trunk floor.X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 377).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:Rtires with run-flat characteristics(MOExtended tires) (Y page 423)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 422)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 465).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 220).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 189).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 459).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 348).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance is approx-imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle ispartially laden and approximately 18 miles(30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.

Flat tire 423

Roadside

Assistance

The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-ure. Make sure that you use the proper sizeand type (summer or winter tire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.

424 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 422).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 384) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 189).

X Press on/off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Flat tire 425

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 426).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 426).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

426 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next to pres-sure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery – important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 76) and (Y page 81).

All vehicles except AMG vehicles:

Battery (vehicle) 427

Roadside

Assistance

Z

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! Always have work on the batteries carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.Should it, in exceptional circumstances, beabsolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, please observe thefollowing:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-ing away.Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Make sure the ignition isswitched off. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.

428 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The batteries and the covers of the positiveterminal clamps must always be installedsecurely during operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro-sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyesor clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Immediately rinse electrolyte oracid splashes off with clean water.Contact a physician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-

cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i Hybrid vehicles: if the battery conditionof charge is sufficient, the high-voltage bat-tery can also supply the 12 V battery withenergy. This only happens if the conditionof charge of the 12 V battery requires this,e.g. after using electrical consumers for anextended period with the engine switchedoff. As the on-board voltage is continuouslymonitored this can also be performedwhenthe engine is switched off. The condition ofcharge of the 12 V battery and the on-boardvoltage are thereby kept stable for a longerperiod.

High-voltage battery – importantsafety notesOnly hybrid vehicles are equippedwith a high-voltage battery.

Battery (vehicle) 429

Roadside

Assistance

Z

G DANGERThe vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Following an accident, do not touch any high-voltage components and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Havethe vehicle towed away after an accident andthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery can exceed acritical value. In this case flammable gasescapes through a ventilation valve on theunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger zone immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehi-cle standing idle for lengthy periods candamage the high-voltage battery. If thevehicle is idle for lengthy periods leave thehigh-voltage battery connected to a charg-ing station.

Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerif you wish to leave your vehicle parked for along period of time.

Charging the 12 V batteryAMG vehicles:

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.4 V.

All other vehicles

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 432).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-

430 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 432).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the batteryif it is still installed in the vehicle, unless youuse a battery charger which has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. A batterycharger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.It permits the charging of the battery in itsinstalled position. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for further informa-tion and availability. Read the battery charg-er's operating instructions before chargingthe battery.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: if theindicator/warning lamps in the instrumentcluster do not light up at low temperatures, itis very likely that the discharged battery hasfrozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. Theservice life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures.Have the thawed-out battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.AMG vehicles: at low temperatures, do notcharge a battery which has been removedusing a battery charger. Allow the battery towarm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise,the service life can be shortened and thestarting characteristics impaired, especiallyat low temperatures.

Battery (vehicle) 431

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.All vehicles except AMG vehicles:

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neithercharge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.All vehicles:

432 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RKeep away from fire and open flames.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RAll vehicles except AMG vehicles: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let thebattery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RDo not lean over the battery.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 189). All indicator lamps in the instrumentclustermust be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 189).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Example: ground point coverX Turn fasteners: oneÕ turn and remove.X Remove the cover whilst pressing down on cap; of the washer fluid reservoir.

Jump-starting 433

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Position numberD identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide coverC of positive terminal= in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal= on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryDusing the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal= on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryD to ground pointB of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryD first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointB and negative terminalA, then frompositive clamp= and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close coverC of positive clamp= after removing the jumper cables.X Replace the ground point cover. Make sure all mountings for the fasteners are positionedprecisely beneath the corresponding recesses in the cover.

X Press fasteners: into the mountings until they engage.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Hybrid vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use theelectric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

434 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 488).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-matically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to thetowing eye only. Otherwise, the vehiclecould become damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission toN anddo not open the driver's or front passeng-er's door during towing. The automatictransmission may otherwise shift to posi-tion P, which could damage the transmis-sion.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-age, have it transported on a transporter ortrailer.The automatic transmission must be in posi-tion N when the vehicle is being towed.

Towing and tow-starting 435

Roadside

Assistance

Z

If the automatic transmission cannot be shif-ted to position N, have the vehicle transpor-ted on a transporter or trailer.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

i Deactivate the automatic locking feature(Y page 98). You could otherwise be lockedout when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Hybrid vehicles:Hybrid vehicles may not be towed away butonly transported if:Rthe multifunction display is not working orRthe~ MalfunctionMalfunction display messageappears in the multifunction display

If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can betowed out of that area with both axles on theground. In this case, the towing distance maynot be greater than 50mandmust not exceeda towing speed of 10 km/h. For longer dis-tances, have the vehicle loaded and trans-ported.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rearand at the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit/stowage tray (Y page 422).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Remove cover: from the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far asit will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 435).

436 Towing and tow-startingRoadside

Assistance

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.In order to ensure that the automatic trans-mission stays in position N when towing thevehicle, you must observe the followingpoints:X You must use the SmartKey instead of theStart/Stop button (Y page 189).

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthe SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi-tion 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 152).i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use the com-bination switch as usual. In this case, onlythe indicator lamps for the direction oftravel flash. After resetting the combina-tion switch, the hazard warning lamp startsflashing again.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedOnly vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the rear axle raised.

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 152).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the igni-tion lock to position 0 and remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Take theSmartKeywith youwhen you leavethe vehicle.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 435).

Transporting the vehicleHybrid vehicles: transportation of the vehi-cle should only be carried out by professionalrecovery companies.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

Towing and tow-starting 437

Roadside

Assistance

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rearaxle is damaged, have the vehicle transportedon a truck or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystem: if the battery is defective, the auto-matic transmission will be locked in positionP. To shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N, you must provide power to the vehi-cle's electrical system in the same way aswhen jump-starting (Y page 432).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could other-wise damage the automatic transmission.

i Information on "Jump-starting"(Y page 432).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe trunk (Y page 440).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 220).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 189).

orX When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock andremove it (Y page 189).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dash-boardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwell

438 FusesRoadside

Assistance

RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand sideof the vehicle, when viewed in the directionof travel

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in thedirection of the arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the front-passenger door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood.X To open: release retaining clamps: andremove cover;.

Fuses 439

Roadside

Assistance

Z

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X Undo screws= on the fuse box.X Remove fuse box cover? forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lyingcorrectly in cover?.

X Insert cover? at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down cover? of the fuse box andtighten screws=.

X Insert cover; and secure with retainingclamps:.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

Example: S‑Class MAYBACH

X Open the trunk lid.X To open: release cover: at the top rightand left-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the directionof the arrow.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in arecess at the side of the fuse box. You canfind the corresponding fuse rating and fusetype on the fuse allocation chart.

Engine emergency offIf the engine cannot be switched off as descri-bed, observe the following procedure:X Take the fuse allocation chart from the fusebox in the trunk (Y page 440).

X Search for “Emergency engine shutdown”in the fuse allocation chart.

X Remove the fuses listed under "Emergencyengine shutdown".

440 FusesRoadside

Assistance

Useful information ............................ 442Important safety notes ..................... 442Operation ........................................... 442Winter operation ............................... 444Tire pressure ..................................... 445Loading the vehicle .......................... 453All about wheels and tires ............... 458Changing a wheel .............................. 465Wheel and tire combinations ........... 471

441

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are notbeing used correctly can impair operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 471).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 453)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 207)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 445)

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

442 OperationWheelsandtires

When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 443). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 445).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth ofapproximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has been

Operation 443

Wheelsandtires

Z

reached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 423).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 423).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 465).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-

444 Winter operationWheelsandtires

ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 448).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 451).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 471).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-

ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 246) orActive Body Control (ABC) (Y page 244),you must drive at raised vehicle level ifsnow chains have been installed.

You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 82)when pulling awaywith snow chains installed.You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increaseddriving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Tire pressure 445

Wheelsandtires

Z

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 453).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

446 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 459).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.

Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Tire pressure 447

Wheelsandtires

Z

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 445).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 445).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

448 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 445).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are installed in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display; see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 450).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check the

Tire pressure 449

Wheelsandtires

Z

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 445). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 451). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 445).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

You can find further information under:(Y page 348).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take up to ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the mal-function has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 189).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels or

450 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

new sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tire pressure in at least one tire istoo low and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 348).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automatically

detect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 445).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 445).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

Tire pressure 451

Wheelsandtires

Z

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart message whichappears in the ServiceService menu of the multi-function display. Information on the messagedisplay can be found in the "Restarting the tirepressure loss warning system" section(Y page 452).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 445).

The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.Additionally, a tire pressure table isattached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pres-sure loss warning system can only give reli-able warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is

452 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

set, these incorrect values will be moni-tored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 445).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 189).

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Loading the vehicle 453

Wheelsandtires

Z

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

454 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 455

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 453).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Example 1Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 5RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 2- Rear: 3RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)- Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)- Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)- Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)- Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 750 lbs (340 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

Example 2Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 3RDistribution of the occupants

- Front: 1- Rear: 2

456 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

RWeight of the occupants- Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)- Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg)- Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 540 lbs (245 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

Example 3Step 1RCombined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard): 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2RNumber of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants): 2RDistribution of the occupants:

- Front: 1RWeight of the occupants

- Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)RTotal weight of all occupants: 150 lbs (68 kg)Step 3RPermissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants):1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 453).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, allpassengers, load and trailer load/noseweight(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

Loading the vehicle 457

Wheelsandtires

Z

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applica-ble, on the tire sidewall between the treadshoulder and maximum tire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 443).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further than

458 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

on surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 444).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 463)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 462)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 462)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 448)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 463)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 459)D Load index (Y page 462)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

All about wheels and tires 459

Wheelsandtires

Z

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-

lated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 453).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 462).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 462).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

460 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph(210km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 471).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 461

Wheelsandtires

Z

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may also be imprinted on the side-wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-ter that identifies the speed rating(Y page 459).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 453).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.

462 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

All about wheels and tires 463

Wheelsandtires

Z

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

464 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 423) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 423).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 466).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.

Changing a wheel 465

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires.Ensure the direction of rotation ismaintained.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 452) or the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 451).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. These advantages can onlybe gained if the tires are installed correspond-ing to the direction of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

X Make sure that "normal" level is selectedfor AIRMATIC (Y page 246).

X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 189).

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignitionlock:X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 422).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

466 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

X On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and hub caps:the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Beforeyou can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must

Changing a wheel 467

Wheelsandtires

Z

remove the hub cap. Two different variantscan be installed.

Vehicles with AMG wheels and plastichub caps:X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure thathub cap: is in the open position. To do so,turn the center cover counter-clockwise.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn thecenter cover clockwise until you feel andhear hub cap: engage.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.

Vehicles with AMGwheels and aluminumhub caps:X To remove: take socket; and lug wrench= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 422).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andloosen hub cap: counter-clockwise.

X Remove hub cap:.

X To install: before installing, check hubcap: and the wheel area for soiling andclean if necessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it isin the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tight-ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you have the hub cap installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Using lug wrench=, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).

468 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicletool kit and place it on the hexagon nut ofthe jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: to protect the vehicle body, thevehicle has covers next to the jacking pointson the outer sills.

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: fold cover? upwards.

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrenchC until the tire israised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from theground.

Removing a wheel

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim canstrike the ceramic-brake disc and damageit. Therefore, you should proceed carefullyand get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second align-ment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid apply-ing any external force on the brake disks. Thiscould impair the level of comfort when brak-ing.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Changing a wheel 469

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 465).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim canstrike the ceramic-brake disc and damageit. Therefore, you should proceed carefullyand get a second person assist to you.Alternatively, you can use a second align-ment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

470 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagonnut of the jack so that the letters AB arevisible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle isonce again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The tightening torque must be110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk again.

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: insert the cover into the outersill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 445).

i Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-tem: all mounted wheels must be equippedwith functioning tire pressure control sen-sors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 445).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.

Wheel and tire combinations 471

Wheelsandtires

Z

Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 423).

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find infor-mation on approved wheel rims and tiresizes for equipping your vehicle with wintertires. Winter tires are not available at thefactory as standard equipment or optionalextras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, in cer-tain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The size of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

472 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

S 400 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 (101 Y) XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

Wheel and tire combinations 473

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

474 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 550

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 475

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

476 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 550 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 W BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XLRA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

Wheel and tire combinations 477

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 100 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

478 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 550 PLUG-IN HYBRID

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/50 R18 100 W3

RA: 275/45 R18 103 W2, 3

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL3

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 Y2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

Wheel and tire combinations 479

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/50 R18 104 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

480 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 600

Summer tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 5

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

Wheel and tire combinations 481

Wheelsandtires

Z

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 5

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 5FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

Winter tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 600 MAYBACH

Summer tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

FA: 245/40 R20 99 Y XL3, 4

RA: 275/35 R20 102 Y XL2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.44 in (36.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Only in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.

482 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

All-weather tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/45 R19 102 H XL M+S3, 4

RA: 275/40 R19 101 H M+S2, 3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.71 in (43.5 mm)

Winter tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

BA: 245/45 R19 102 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

S 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL6

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 6FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/45 ZR19 (104 Y) XL6

RA: 285/40 ZR19 (107 Y) XL2, 6FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

3 Available as MOExtended tires4 Not in conjunction with AMG Sports package code 951.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.6 Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.

Wheel and tire combinations 483

Wheelsandtires

Z

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL7

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 7FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL7

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 7FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tiresR 19

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/45 R19 104 V XL M+Si6 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 7

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 7

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

7 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.6 Not in combination with a ceramic brake system.

484 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

S 65 AMG

Summer tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL7

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 7FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 ZR20 (101 Y) XL7

RA: 285/35 ZR20 (104 Y) XL2, 7FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Winter tiresR 20

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

BA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 7

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.50 in (38 mm)

FA: 255/40 R20 101 V XL M+Si7

RA: 285/35 R20 104 V XL M+Si2, 7

FA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

7 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 485

Wheelsandtires

Z

486

Useful information ............................ 488Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 488Identification plates ......................... 488Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 489Vehicle data ....................................... 495

487

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 29).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

488 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door.X Fold cover: down and remove it.You will see the VIN.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 489)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 488)

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Emission control information plate,

including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOperator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification in

Service products and filling capacities 489

Technicaldata

Z

accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

Plug-in hybrid vehicles 16.6 US gal(63.0 l)

All other models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles Approx.3.2 US gal(12.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)

490 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporarymeasure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption.Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lowerAKI.

Information on refueling (Y page 206).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 489).

Service products and filling capacities 491

Technicaldata

Z

The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

S 400 4MATICS 550 PLUG-INHYBRID

276 229.5

AMG vehicles 157279

229.5

All other models 277278

229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

S 400 4MATICS 550 PLUG-INHYBRID

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

S 600S 600 MAYBACH

11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

S 65 AMG 11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

All other AMGvehi-cles

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

492 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 489).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance withMB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

S 400 4MATIC 13.0 US qt (12.3 l)

S 600S 600 MAYBACH

15.7 US qt (14.9 l)

Service products and filling capacities 493

Technicaldata

Z

Model Capacity

S 63 AMG 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

S 65 AMG 11.3 US qt (10.7 l)

S 550 PLUG-INHYBRID

13.3 US qt (12.6 l)

All other models 12.8 US qt (12.1 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

494 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Warning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Refrigerant

S 550 PLUG-IN HYBRID 25.0 ± 0.4 oz(710 ± 10 g)

S 63 AMG 4MATIC

Model PAG oil

S 550 PLUG-IN HYBRID 4.3 oz(120 g)

S 63 AMG 4MATIC

Vehicles without rear-compartment air-condi-tioning system

Capacity

Refrigerant 23.3 ± 0.4 oz(660 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 3.9 oz(110 g)

Vehicles with rear-com-partment air-condition-ing system

Capacity

Refrigerant 27.1 ± 0.4 oz(770 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Trunk lid opening dimensions (example: S‑ClassMAYBACH)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model :: Opening height

S 550 PLUG-INHYBRID

S 600S 600 MAYBACH

71.1 in(1806 mm)

AMG vehicles 71.2 in(1808 mm)

All other models 71.0 in(1803 mm)

Vehicle data 495

Technicaldata

Z

S-Class with a short wheelbase

All models

Vehicle length 201.4 in (5116mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Vehicle height 58.9 in (1496 mm)

Wheelbase 119.5 in (3035mm)

Turning radius 39.0 ft (11.90 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

S-Class with a long wheelbaseMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

AMG vehicles

Vehicle length 208.1 in (5287mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1499 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 124.6 in (3165mm)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Model (AMG vehi-cles)

Maximum trunkload

S 65 AMG

All other models 100 kg

Model (AMG vehi-cles)

Turning radius

S 63 AMG 4MATIC 41.0 ft (12.50 m)

S 65 AMG 40.4 ft (12.30 m)

All other models

Vehicle length 206.5 in (5246mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 124.6 in (3165mm)

Turning radius 40.4 ft (12.30 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle height

S 550 PLUG-INHYBRID

S 550S 550 4MATIC

58.8 in (1494 mm)

S 600 58.9 in (1497 mm)

High-voltage battery(S 550 L PLUG-INHYBRID)

Model Lithium-ion

Energy content 8.7 kWh

Nominal capacity 22 Ah

Range in electric-onlymode (according toNEDC)

496 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

High-voltage battery(S 550 L PLUG-INHYBRID)

Charging time at 16 A(using a charging stationor wallbox)

Approx. 2 h

Charging time at 8 A(using a mains socket)

S‑Class MAYBACH

All models

Vehicle length 214.7 in (5453mm)

Vehicle height 59.0 in (1498 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

83.9 in (2130 mm)

Wheelbase 132.5 in (3365mm)

Turning radius 42.3 ft (12.90 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle data 497

Technicaldata

Z

498

499

500